Motorola Solutions 99FT3086 Mobile Transmitter User Manual MOTOTRBO User Guide

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1599921
Application ID	IpoGBsKnQHhyh8L7xwAG5A==
Document Description	User Manual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	292.41kB (3655146 bits)
Date Submitted	2011-12-09 00:00:00
Date Available	2012-03-01 00:00:00
Creation Date	2011-09-08 11:16:42
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2011-11-15 10:47:49
Document Title	MOTOTRBO User Guide
Document Creator	FrameMaker 8.0
Document Author:	Motorola Solutions, Inc.

MOTOTRBO XPRTM 5550
Color Display Mobile
User Guide
68009504001-A
Declaration of Conformity
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a)
Responsible Party
Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.
Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744
Declaration of Conformity
This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below.
Hereby declares that the product:
Model Name: XPR 5550
conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)
Class B Digital Device
As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
English
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Declaration of Conformity
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
ii
English
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Contents
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance . . .ix
Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Computer Software Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
How to Use This User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What Your Dealer/System Administrator
Can Tell You . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Powering Up the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Identifying Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Programmable Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Assignable Radio Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . . . . . . . . . 6
Accessing the Programmed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Identifying Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Display Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Call Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Advanced Menu Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mini Notice Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sent Item Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Bluetooth Device Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Indicator Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Audio Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Contents
This User Guide contains all the information you need
to use the MOTOTRBO XPR Series Digital Mobile
Radios.
Using the Volume/Channel Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Switching Between Conventional Analog and Digital
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Capacity Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Receiving and Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecting a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecting a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selecting a Radio Channel, Subscriber Alias or ID, or
Group Alias or ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . . . . . . 17
Receiving and Responding to a Group Call . . . . . 17
Receiving and Responding to a Private Call . . . 18
Receiving an All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call . . 19
Making a Radio Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
English
iii
Contents
Making a Call with the Volume/Channel Knob . . 21
Making a Group Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Making a Private Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Making an All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Making a Selective Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Making a Call with the Scroll Up and Scroll Down
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Making a Call with the Channel Up and Channel Down
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Making a Group or Private Call with the One Touch
Access Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Stopping a Radio Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Talkaround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Permanent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
iv
Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Radio Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sending a Radio Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Initiating Remote Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Stopping Remote Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Scan Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Viewing an Entry in the Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Editing the Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adding a New Entry to the Scan List . . . . . . . . 30
Deleting an Entry from the Scan List . . . . . . . . 31
Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan
English
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Starting and Stopping Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Responding to a Transmission During a Scan . . 33
Deleting a Nuisance Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Restoring a Nuisance Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Vote Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Contacts Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Making a Group Call from Contacts . . . . . . . . . . 35
Making a Private Call from Contacts . . . . . . . . . 36
Assigning an Entry to a Programmable
Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Removing the Association between Entry and
Programmable Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting Default Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Call Indicator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private
Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective
Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry
Status with Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages . . . . . . . . 51
Resending a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Forwarding a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Managing Sent Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Viewing a Sent Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Sending a Sent Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Receiving a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Reading a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Managing Received Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . 55
Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox . . . . . 56
Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from the
Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Replying to a Text Message with Quick Text . . 56
Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox . . . . . 57
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox . . . 58
Analog Message Encode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher . . 58
Analog Status Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sending Status Update to Predefined Contact . . 59
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IP Site Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Starting an Automatic Site Search . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Stopping an Automatic Site Search . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Starting a Manual Site Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Contents
Assigning Ring Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Escalating Alarm Tone Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Call Log Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Viewing Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Deleting a Call from a Call List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Call Alert Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert . . . . . . 43
Making a Call Alert from the Contacts List . . . . . . 43
Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Receiving an Emergency Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Responding to an Emergency Alarm . . . . . . . . . . 45
Sending an Emergency Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call . . . . . . . 47
Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Reinitiating an Emergency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Exiting Emergency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Text Messaging Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sending a Quick Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch
Access Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Managing Text Messages in the Drafts Folder . . 51
Viewing a Saved Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts . . 51
English
Contents
vi
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lone Worker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Bluetooth On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device . .
Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device . . . . . . .
Switching Audio Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Device Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the Notification List . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off . . . . .
Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level . . . .
Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off . . . . . . .
Setting the Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Horns/Lights On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Public Address System On or Off . .
Turning the External Public Address System On
or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Squelch Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off . . . . .
English
63
63
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
71
71
71
71
72
Turning the LED Indicators On or Off . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference . . . . . . 73
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)
Feature On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off . 74
Identifying Cable Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Voice Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Menu Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Analog Mic AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Digital Mic AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Intelligent Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Accessing General Radio Information . . . . . . . . 77
Checking the Radio Alias and ID . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking the GPS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Keypad Microphone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Keypad Tones On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Zone by Alias Search . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial . . . . . .
79
80
81
81
81
82
Radio Enable via Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Password Lock Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Accessing the Radio from Password . . . . . . . . . . 94
Unlocking the Radio from Locked State . . . . . . . 95
Turning the Password Lock On or Off . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Front Panel Configuration (FPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Entering FPC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Editing FPC Mode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Contents
Initiating Remote Monitor by Manual Dial . . . . . . 82
Making a Private Call by Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . 83
Making a Group, Private or All Call with the
Programmable Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search 85
Editing the Scan List by Alias Search . . . . . . . . . 85
Adding a New Entry to the Scan List . . . . . . . . 85
Deleting an Entry from the Scan List . . . . . . . . 86
Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Storing an Alias or ID from a Call List . . . . . . . . . 87
Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Writing and Sending a Text Message . . . . . . . . . 88
Replying to Text Messages from the Inbox . . . . . 89
Editing a Quick Reply Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Accessing the Drafts Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message . . 91
Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages . . . . . . . . 91
Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial . . 91
Editing a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Radio Disable via Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Desktop Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mounting Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Miscellaneous Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Special Channel Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Emergency Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Non-Commercial Call Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operating Frequency Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 101
vii
English
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Contents
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
viii
English
Software Version
Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance
All the features described in the following sections are
supported by the radio's software version R02.00.00.
Before using this product, read the operating
instructions for safe usage contained in the
Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet
enclosed with your radio.
ATTENTION!
This radio is restricted to occupational use only to
satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements.
Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness
information and operating instructions in the Regulatory
Compliance and Product Safety section of your Quick
Reference Guide enclosed with your radio (Motorola
Publication part number 68009508001) to ensure
compliance with RF energy exposure limits.
See Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
Version on page 78 to determine your radio's software
version.
Please check with your dealer or system administrator
for more details of all the features supported.
Important Safety Information
Important Safety Information
For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other
accessories, visit the following website:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise
ix
English
Computer Software Copyrights
Computer Software Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this manual may
include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored
in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the
United States and other countries preserve for Motorola
certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer
programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right
to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted
computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted
Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola
products described in this manual may not be copied,
reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed
in any manner without the express written permission of
Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola
products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola,
except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that
arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
English
The AMBE+2TM voice coding Technology embodied in
this product is protected by intellectual property rights
including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use
within this Communications Equipment. The user of this
Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to
decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object
Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a
human-readable form.
U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,
#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,
#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,
#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.
Getting Started
How to Use This User Guide
Selected features are also available on the single-site trunking
mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus on page 8 for more
information.
What Your Dealer/System Administrator
Can Tell You
You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the
following:
This User Guide covers the basic operation of the MOTOTRBO
Mobiles.
• Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional
However, your dealer or system administrator may have
customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your
dealer or system administrator for more information.
• Which buttons have been programmed to access other
Getting Started
Take a moment to review the following:
How to Use This User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
What Your Dealer/System Administrator
Can Tell You. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Powering Up the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Adjusting the Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
For features that are available in both Analog and Digital
modes, no icon is shown.
channels?
features?
• What optional accessories may suit your needs?
Throughout this publication, the icons below are used to
indicate features supported in either the conventional Analog
mode or conventional Digital mode:
Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature.
Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature.
English
Powering Up the Radio
Press the On/Off
Button briefly. You see
MOTOTRBO (TM) on the
radio’s display
momentarily, followed
by a welcome message
or welcome image.
Adjusting the Volume
The green LED lights
up and the Home
screen lights up.
A brief tone sounds,
indicating that the
power up test is
successful.
Getting Started
To increase the volume, turn the Volume/Channel Knob
clockwise.
On/Off Button
Volume/Channel Knob
OK
MENU
MEN
P1
P2
NOTE: There is no power up tone if the radio tones/alerts
function is disabled (see Turning the Radio Tones/
Alerts On or Off on page 68).
If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer.
To turn off the radio, press and hold the On/Off Button until you
see Powering Down on the radio’s display.
NOTE: Your radio may take up to 7 seconds to completely turn
off.
English
P3
P4
P1
P2
P3
P4
To decrease the volume, turn this knob counterclockwise.
NOTE: Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum
volume offset where the volume level cannot be turned
past the programmed minimum volume. Check with
your dealer or system administrator for more
information.
1
Identifying Radio Controls
Radio Controls
OK
MENU
P1
10
P2
P3
1 On/Off Button
6 Speaker
2 Volume/Channel Knob
7 Return/Home Button
3 Display
8 Front Programmable Buttons
4 OK/Menu Button
9 Accessory Connector
5 Scroll Up/Down
10 LED Indicators
P4
Identifying Radio Controls
Take a moment to review the following:
Radio Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Programmable Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Accessing the Programmed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Using the Volume/Channel Knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Switching Between Conventional Analog and
Digital Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Capacity Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
English
Programmable Buttons
Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as
shortcuts to radio functions or up to a maximum of six (6)
preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button
press:
• Short press – Pressing and releasing rapidly.
• Long press – Pressing and holding for the programmed
Identifying Radio Controls
duration.
• Hold down – Keeping the button pressed.
NOTE: The programmed duration of a button press is
applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or
settings. See Emergency Operation on page 44 for
more information on the programmed duration of the
Emergency button.
 Assignable Radio Functions
Bluetooth® Audio Switch – Toggles audio routing between
internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled
accessory.
Contacts – Provides direct access to the contacts list.
Call Alert – Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to
select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent.
Call Log – Selects the call log list.
Voice Announcement for Channel – Plays zone and channel
announcement voice messages for the current channel. This
function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled.
Emergency – Depending on the programming, initiates or
cancels an Emergency alarm or call.
Ext PA On/Off – Toggles the audio routing between the
connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the
radio’s internal public address (PA) system.
Intelligent Audio On/Off – Toggles Intelligent Audio on or off.
Manual Dial
ID.
– Initiates a call by keying in any subscriber
Manual Site Roam*
– Starts the manual site search.
Mic AGC On/Off – Toggles the internal microphone automatic
gain control (AGC) on or off. Not applicable during a Bluetooth
session.
Monitor – Monitors a selected channel for activity.
Nuisance Channel Delete* – Temporarily removes an
unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the
scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the user’s selected
zone/channel combination from which scan is initiated.
Call Forwarding – Toggles Call Forwarding on or off.
English
* Not applicable in Capacity Plus
Site Lock On/Off*
off.
Option Board Feature – Toggles option board feature(s) on or
off for option board-enabled channels.
Status – Selects the status list menu.
PA On/Off – Toggles the radio’s internal public address (PA)
system on or off.
Permanent Monitor* – Monitors a selected channel for all radio
traffic until function is disabled.
Privacy
– Toggles privacy on or off.
Radio Alias and ID – Provides radio alias and ID.
Radio Check
– Determines if a radio is active in a system.
Radio Enable
enabled.
– Allows a target radio to be remotely
Radio Disable
disabled.
– Allows a target radio to be remotely
Telemetry Control
remote radio.
Text Message
– Toggles the automatic site roam on or
– Controls the Output Pin on a local or
– Selects the text message menu.
Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey
– Stops the
transmission of a remote monitored radio without giving any
indicators, or an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel.
Voice Announcement On/Off – Toggles Voice Announcement
on or off.
Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) – Toggles VOX on or
off.
Identifying Radio Controls
One Touch Access
– Directly initiates a predefined
Private or Group Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message.
Zone Toggle – Allows radio to switch between zones.
Remote Monitor
– Turns on the microphone of a target
radio without it giving any indicators.
Repeater/Talkaround* – Toggles between using a repeater and
communicating directly with another radio.
Scan* – Toggles scan on or off.
* Not applicable in Capacity Plus
English
 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions
All Tones/Alerts – Toggles all tones and alerts on or off.
Backlight – Adjusts the brightness level.
Channel Up/Down – Depending on the programming, changes
channel to previous or next channel.
Accessing the Programmed Functions
You can access various radio functions through one of the
following ways:
• A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons.
OR
Display Mode – Toggles the day/night display mode on or off.
Identifying Radio Controls
Power Level – Toggles transmit power level between high and
low.
Squelch
normal.
English
– Toggles squelch level between tight and
• Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:
1 To access the menu, press the g button. Press the
appropriate Scroll Up/Down button (f or h) to access
the menu functions.
2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press the g
button.
3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the previous
screen, press the e button. Long press the e button to
return to the Home screen.
The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available on a keypad
microphone (see Using the Keypad on page 80).
NOTE: Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period
of inactivity and returns to your Home screen.
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button
You can turn off the Channel Free Indication tone or the
• While a call is in progress,
the PTT button allows the
radio to transmit to other
radios in the call.
PTT Button
Press and hold down PTT
button to talk. Release the
PTT button to listen.
The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed.
• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make
a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 20).
If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On
or Off on page 69) or the PTT Sidetone
is enabled, wait
until the short alert tone ends before talking.
During a call, if the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you
hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the
radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
PTT Sidetone
by disabling all radio tones and alerts
(see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on
page 68).
Using the Volume/Channel Knob
The Volume/Channel Knob can be programmed as dual
purpose for both volume and channel or as a volume-only
control.
To adjust volume, see Adjusting the Volume on page 2.
To change channels, push and hold the knob until channel
selection screen is displayed, then turn the knob to the required
channel.
Identifying Radio Controls
The PTT button on the side of
the microphone serves two
basic purposes:
You also hear the Channel Free Indication tone if your call
is interrupted, for example when the radio receives an
Emergency Call.
To exit channel selection state, do any of the following.
• Push the Volume/Channel Knob again
• Press g
• Press e
• Wait for the menu timer to expire
English
Switching Between Conventional Analog
and Digital Mode
Each channel in your
radio can be
configured as a
conventional analog or
conventional digital
channel.
Scroll Up/Down
Volume/Channel Knob
OK
P1
P2
P3
P4
Identifying Radio Controls
• Scroll Up/Down buttons, or
• Volume/Channel Knob, or
• programmed Channel Up or Channel Down buttons
When switching from digital to analog mode, certain features
are unavailable. Icons for the digital features (such as
Messages) reflect this change by appearing ‘grayed out’.
Disabled features are hidden in the menu.
Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital
mode. However, the minor differences in the way each feature
works does NOT affect the performance of your radio.
NOTE: Your radio also switches between digital and analog
modes during a dual mode scan (see Scan on
page 32).
English
Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration of the
MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to
support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature
allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of
programmed channels while in Repeater Mode.
MENU
To switch between an analog or a digital channel, use the
Capacity Plus
Icons of features not applicable to Capacity Plus are not
available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you
try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via a
programmable button press.
Your radio also has features that are available in both
conventional digital mode and Capacity Plus. However, the
minor differences in the way each feature works does NOT
affect the performance of your radio.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for more
information on this system.
Identifying Status Indicators
The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio
status, text entries, and menu entries.
The following are icons that appear on the status bar at the top
of the radio’s display. Icons are displayed on the status bar,
arranged left-to-right, in order of appearance/usage and are
channel specific.
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
The number of bars displayed represents the radio
signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest
signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving.
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no
remote Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth Connected
The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit
when one or more remote Bluetooth devices are
connected.
Identifying Status Indicators
Your radio indicates its operational status through the following:
Display Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Call Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
Sent Item Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
Audio Tones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
Indicator Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Display Icons
Emergency
Radio is in Emergency mode.
Notification
Notification list is not empty.
Scan*
Scan feature is enabled.
English
Scan – Priority 1*
Radio detects activity on channel/group designated
as Priority 1).
GPS Not Available/Out of Range
The GPS feature is enabled but is not receiving data
from the satellite.
Scan – Priority 2*
Radio detects activity on channel/group designated
as Priority 2.
Option Board
The Option Board is enabled.
Option Board Non-Function
The Option Board is disabled.
Identifying Status Indicators
Vote Scan
Vote scan feature is enabled.
10
English
Tones Disable
Tones are turned off.
Monitor
Selected channel is being monitored.
Talkaround*
In the absence of a repeater, radio is currently
configured for direct radio to radio communication.
Site Roaming*
The site roaming feature is enabled.
Secure
The Privacy feature is enabled.
Unsecure
The Privacy feature is disabled.
GPS Available
The GPS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when
a position fix is available.
Power Level
Radio is set at Low power.
OR
Radio is set at High power.
* Not applicable in Capacity Plus
Call Icons
Private Call
Indicates a Private Call in progress.
In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscriber alias
(name) or ID (number).
Group Call/All Call
Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress.
In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name)
or ID (number).
The following icons appear beside menu items on the radio’s
display that offer a choice between two options or as an
indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
Checkbox (Empty)
Indicates the option is not selected.
Checkbox (Checked)
Indicates the option is selected.
Solid Black Box
Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a
sub-menu.
Identifying Status Indicators
The following icons appear on the radio’s display during a call.
These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or
ID type.
Advanced Menu Icons
11
English
Mini Notice Icons
The following icons appear momentarily on the radio’s display
after an action to perform task is taken.
Identifying Status Indicators
Successful Transmission (Positive)
Successful action taken.
12
English
Sent Item Icons
The following icons appear in the Sent Items folder.
OR
Sent Successfully
The text message is sent successfully.
OR
Send Failed
The text message cannot be sent.
Failed Transmission (Negative)
Failed action taken.
Transmission in Progress (Transitional)
Transmitting. This dynamic icon is seen before
indication for Successful Transmission or Failed
Transmission.
In-Progress
OR
• The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is
pending transmission, followed by waiting for
acknowledgement.
• The text message to a group alias or ID is pending
transmission.
Bluetooth Device Icons
LED indicators show the operational status of your radio.
Bluetooth Data Device
Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner.
Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset.
Red
Yellow
Bluetooth PTT Device
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only
Device (POD).
Green
P1
P2
Blinking red – Radio is receiving an emergency transmission
or has failed the self-test upon powering up.
Solid green – Radio is powering up, or transmitting.
Identifying Status Indicators
The following icons also appear next to items in the list of
Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type.
LED Indicators
Blinking green – Radio is receiving a non-privacy-enabled call
or data, or detecting activity over the air.
Double blinking green – Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled
call or data.
Solid yellow – Radio is monitoring a conventional channel.
Blinking yellow – Radio is scanning for activity or receiving a
Call Alert.
13
English
Double blinking yellow – Radio is no longer connected to the
repeater while in Capacity Plus, all Capacity Plus channels are
currently busy, Auto Roaming is enabled, radio is actively
searching for a new site. Also indicates radio has yet to respond
to a group call alert, or radio is locked.
Identifying Status Indicators
NOTE: While in conventional mode, when the green LED
blinks, it indicates the radio detects activity over the air.
Due to the nature of the digital protocol, this activity
may or may not affect the radio's programmed channel.
14
English
For Capacity Plus, there is no LED indication when the
radio is detecting activity over the air.
Indicator Tones
High pitched tone
Low pitched tone
Positive Indicator Tone
Negative Indicator Tone
Audio Tones
Receiving and Making Calls
Continuous Tone
Periodic Tone
A monotone sound. Sounds
continuously until termination.
Sounds periodically depending on the
duration set by the radio. Tone starts,
stops, and repeats itself.
Repetitive Tone
A single tone that repeats itself until it is
terminated by the user.
Momentary Tone
Sounds only once for a short period of
time defined by the radio.
Once you understand how your MOTOTRBO Mobile is
configured, you are ready to use your radio.
Use this navigation guide to familiarize yourself with the basic
Call features:
Selecting a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
Selecting a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Selecting a Radio Channel, Subscriber Alias or ID,
or Group Alias or ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . . . . . . . . . page 17
Making a Radio Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20
Stopping a Radio Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25
Talkaround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26
Permanent Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26
Selecting a Site
Receiving and Making Calls
Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the radio’s
status or the radio’s response to data received.
A site is a specific area where a base station is placed to
provide optimal coverage for the radio.
If enabled, your radio is able to connect to different available
sites via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
See IP Site Connect on page 60 for more information.
15
English
Selecting a Zone
A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 99
channels and 2 zones, with a maximum of 99 channels per
zone.
Receiving and Making Calls
Use the following procedure to select a zone.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Zone button and proceed to Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Zone and press g to select.
3 The current zone is displayed and indicated by a 9.
4 f or h to the required zone and press g to select.
5 The display shows  Selected momentarily and
returns to the selected zone screen.
16
English
Selecting a Radio Channel, Subscriber
Alias or ID, or Group Alias or ID
Procedure:
Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple
zones in your radio), use the Scroll Up/Down buttons,
Volume/Channel Knob, or programmed Channel Up/Down
buttons to select the channel, subscriber alias or ID, or group
alias or ID.
OR
Press the programmed One Touch Access button to select
the preset channel assigned to the button.
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call
Procedure:
When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen):
1 The green LED blinks.
Green
LED
NOTE: The green LED lights up while the radio is transmitting
and double blinks when the radio is receiving a privacyenabled call.
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must
have the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and
Key ID (programmed by your dealer) as the
transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call
from).
OK
MENU
2 The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first
text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays
the group call alias.
P1
PIf2the Channel
P 3 Free
P 4Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
OR
If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT
button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and
free the channel for you to talk/respond.
Receiving and Making Calls
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be
configured as part of that group.
Once the channel, subscriber
alias or ID, or group alias or ID
is displayed, you can proceed
to receive and respond to
calls.
The green LED lights up
while the radio is transmitting
and blinks when the radio is
receiving.
 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call
4 The green LED lights up.
See Privacy on page 59 for more information.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
17
English
6 Release the PTT button to listen.
7 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
See Making a Group Call on page 21 for details on making a
Group Call.
Receiving and Making Calls
 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another
individual radio.
There are two types of Private Calls. The first type, where a
radio presence check is performed prior to setting up the call,
while the other sets up the call immediately.
When your radio is checked, the green LED blinks.
Only one of these call types can be programmed to your radio
by your dealer.
Procedure:
When you receive a Private Call:
1 The green LED blinks.
2 The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the caller alias.
18
English
3 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
OR
If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT
button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and
free the channel for you to talk/respond.
4 The green LED lights up.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
6 Release the PTT button to listen.
7 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
8 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
See Making a Private Call on page 22 for details on making a
Private Call.
 Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call
An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the
channel. It is used to make important announcements requiring
the user’s full attention.
A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another
individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analoganalogue
system.
Procedure:
When you receive an All Call:
Procedure:
When you receive a Selective Call:
1 A tone sounds and the green LED blinks.
1 The green LED blinks.
2 The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first
2 The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays
All Call.
3 Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous
screen before receiving the call.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now
available for use.
You cannot respond to an All Call.
See Making an All Call on page 22 for details on making an All
Call.
NOTE: The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a
different channel while receiving the call.
During an All Call, you are not able to continue with
any menu navigation or editing until the call ends.
first text line shows the caller alias or Selective Call or
Alert with Call.
3 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
4 The LED lights up solid green.
Receiving and Making Calls
 Receiving an All Call
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
6 Release the PTT button to listen.
7 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
8 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
19
English
NOTE: See Making a Selective Call on page 23 for details on
making a Selective Call.
Making a Radio Call
You can select a channel, subscriber alias or ID, or group alias
or ID by using:
• Volume/Channel Knob
• Scroll Up/Down buttons
Receiving and Making Calls
• The programmed Channel Up or Channel Down buttons
20
English
• A programmed One Touch Access button
• The programmed number keys – This method is for Group,
Private and All Calls only and is used with the keypad
microphone (see Making a Group, Private or All Call with
the Programmable Number Key on page 83).
• The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 34)
• Manual Dial (via Contacts) – This method is for Private Calls
only and is dialed using a keypad microphone (see Making a
Private Call by Manual Dial on page 83)
NOTE: Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on
the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission.
Only target radios with the same Privacy Key as your
radio are able to unscramble the transmission.
See Privacy on page 59 for more information.
 Making a Call with the Volume/Channel Knob
5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
 Making a Group Call
To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be
configured as part of that group.
Procedure:
1 Press the Volume/Channel Knob to enter the channel
selection state.
2 Turn the knob to select the channel with the active group
alias or ID.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the group call alias.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond. Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
7 Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the
call.
You can also make a Group Call via Contacts (see Making a
Group Call from Contacts on page 35).
Receiving and Making Calls
responds, the green LED blinks. You see the Group Call
icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias
or ID on your display.
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
21
English
Receiving and Making Calls
 Making a Private Call
5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call
initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must
be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call.
6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
You hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private
Call via the Menu, Call Log, Contacts list, One Touch Access
button, the programmed number keys, Scroll Up/Down
buttons, or the Volume/Channel Knob if this feature is not
enabled.
Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an
individual radio. See Text Messaging Features on page 50 or
Call Alert Operation on page 43 for more information.
Procedure:
1 Press the Volume/Channel Knob to enter the channel
selection state.
2 Turn the knob to select the channel with the active
subscriber alias or ID.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
22
English
responds, the green LED blinks.
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
7 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
You can also make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making a
Private Call from Contacts on page 36), manually dial a
Private Call (see Making a Private Call by Manual Dial on
page 83) or perform a quick alphanumeric search for the
required target alias via a keypad entry (see Making a Group,
Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search on page 84).
 Making an All Call
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the channel.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
Procedure:
1 Press the Volume/Channel Knob to enter the channel
selection state.
2 Turn the knob to select the channel with the active All Call
group alias or ID.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.
 Making a Selective Call
Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/or respond to
a Selective Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your
radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call.
Procedure:
1 Press the Volume/Channel Knob to enter the channel
selection state.
2 Turn the knob to select the channel with the active
subscriber alias or ID.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
Receiving and Making Calls
up. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows All Call.
5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
responds, the green LED blinks.
6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
23
English
7 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
 Making a Call with the Scroll Up and Scroll Down
Buttons
Receiving and Making Calls
You can use the programmed Channel Up and Channel Down
buttons to replace the usage of the Volume/Channel Knob to
select the channel with the active group ID or active subscriber
ID.
Refer to the instructions in Making a Call with the Volume/
Channel Knob from page 21 and replace Steps 1 and 2 of each
with the following:
1 f or h while in the Home screen to select the channel
with the active group ID or active subscriber ID.
 Making a Call with the Channel Up and Channel
Down Buttons
 Making a Group or Private Call with the One Touch
Access Button
The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Group,
Private or Phone Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This
feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button
press.
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch
Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch
Access buttons programmed.
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make
a Group or Private Call to the predefined alias or ID.
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Group/Private Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second
text line displays the call status for a Private Call.
You can use the programmed Channel Up and Channel Down
buttons to replace the usage of the Volume/Channel Knob to
select the channel with the active group ID or active subscriber
ID.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
Refer to the instructions in Making a Call with the Volume/
Channel Knob from page 21 and replace Steps 1 and 2 of each
with the following:
For Group Call only: Wait for the PTT Sidetone to
finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
1 Press the Channel Up or Channel Down button to select
the channel with the active group ID or active subscriber ID.
24
English
clearly into the microphone.
OR
4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
responds, the green LED blinks.
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
6 Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the
call.
For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends.
This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or Private Call
to free the channel for transmission. For example, when a radio
experiences a “stuck microphone” condition where the PTT
button is inadvertently pressed by the user.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this
feature.
Procedure:
While on the required channel:
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey
button.
2 The display shows Remote Dekey.
3 Wait for acknowledgment.
4 The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display
shows Remote Dekey Success, indicating that the channel
is now free.
OR
The radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display
shows Remote Dekey Failed.
Receiving and Making Calls
5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
Stopping a Radio Call
On the interrupted radio, the display shows
Call Interrupted, and the radio sounds a negative indicator
tone until you release the PTT button, if it is transmitting an
interruptible call that is stopped via this feature.
25
English
Talkaround
You can continue to communicate when your repeater is not
operating, or when your radio is out of the repeater’s range but
within talking range of other radios. This is called “talkaround”.
Receiving and Making Calls
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
Permanent Monitor
Use the Permanent Monitor feature to continuously monitor a
selected channel for activity.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
Procedure:
Procedure:
Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button to toggle
between talkaround and repeater modes.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button.
1 g to access the menu.
3 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button to exit
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Talkaround and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable Talkaround. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Talkaround. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
6 The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
The Talkaround setting is retained even after powering down.
26
English
2 Radio sounds an alert tone, the yellow LED lights up, and
the display shows Permanent Monitor On. The monitor
icon appears on the status bar.
Permanent Monitor mode.
4 Radio sounds an alert tone, the yellow LED turns off, and
display shows Permanent Monitor Off.
Radio Check
Advanced Features
Radio Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vote Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Indicator Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Log Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Alert Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Messaging Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Message Encode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Status Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Site Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lone Worker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 27
page 28
page 30
page 32
page 34
page 34
page 38
page 41
page 43
page 44
page 50
page 58
page 59
page 59
page 60
page 63
page 65
page 65
page 68
page 68
If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio
is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No
audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio.
This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs.
 Sending a Radio Check
Procedure:
Use the programmed Radio Check button.
1 Press the programmed Radio Check button.
2 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
Advanced Features
Use this navigation guide to learn more about advanced
features available with your radio:
g to select.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green.
4 Wait for acknowledgement.
5 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
6 Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
OR
27
English
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
g to select.
Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a
target radio (subscriber IDs only). No audible or visual indication
is given to the target radio. You can use this feature to monitor,
remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
4 f or h to Radio Check and press g to select.
 Initiating Remote Monitor
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
Procedure:
Use the programmed Remote Monitor button.
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
Advanced Features
Remote Monitor
6 Wait for acknowledgement.
1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button.
7 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
2 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
8 Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
If the e button is pressed when the radio is waiting for
acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and the radio terminates all
retries and exits Radio Check mode.
You can also initiate Radio Check via manual dial (see
Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial on page 82).
28
English
g to select.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
4 Wait for acknowledgment.
5 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing
audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration
and display shows Rem. Monitor.
Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and
the LED turns off.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
 Stopping Remote Monitor
Procedure:
Use the menu.
Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed
duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio.
1 g to access the menu.
Procedure:
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
g to select.
4 f or h to Remote Mon. and press g to select.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
7 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing
audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration
and display shows Rem. Monitor.
Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and
the LED turns off.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone
the display shows negative mini notice.
button.
2 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
3 Wait for acknowledgment.
Advanced Features
OR
You can also manually select a target radio address (see
Initiating Remote Monitor by Manual Dial on page 82).
4 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
29
English
Scan Lists
Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/
groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the
channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current
channel/group.
There is no priority icon if priority is set to None.
Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of
16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both
analog and digital entries.
 Adding a New Entry to the Scan List
You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list.
You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front Panel
Programming.
Advanced Features
channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2
channels in a scan list.
 Editing the Scan List
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
4 f or h to Add Member and press g to select.
 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List
5 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 Use f or h to view each member on the list.
The priority icon appears left of the member’s alias, if set, to
indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2
30
English
select.
6 f or h to the required priority level and press g to
select.
7 The display shows positive mini notice, followed
immediately by Add Another?.
8 f or h to Yes and press g to select, to add another
entry, and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
OR
f or h to No and press g to select to save the current
list.
 Deleting an Entry from the Scan List
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
5 f or h to Delete and press g to select.
6 At Delete Entry?, f or h to Yes and press g to
select, to delete the entry. The display shows positive mini
notice.
OR
f or h to No and press g to select to return to the
previous screen.
List
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
5 f or h to Edit Priority and press g to select.
6 f or h to the required priority level and press g to
Advanced Features
Procedure:
 Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan
select.
7 The display shows positive mini notice before returning to
the previous screen.
7 Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to delete other entries.
8 The priority icon appears left of the member’s name.
After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press e to
return to the Home screen.
There is no priority icon if priority is set to None.
31
English
Scan
When you start a scan, your radio cycles through the
programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice
activity.
The yellow LED blinks and the scan icon appears on the status
bar.
Advanced Features
During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and
your radio locks onto an analog channel, it automatically
switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of
the call. This is also true for the reverse.
 Starting and Stopping Scan
Procedure:
Press the programmed Scan button to start or stop Scan. OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 Use the Scroll Up/Down buttons to select a channel
programmed with a scan list.
2 g to access the menu.
3 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
4 f or h to Scan State and press g to select.
There are two ways of initiating scan:
5 f or h to required scan state and press g to select.
• Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scans all the
6 The display shows Scan On when scan is enabled. The
channels/groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your
radio may – depending on the settings – automatically start
on the last scanned “active” channel/group or on the channel
where scan was initiated.
• Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automatically starts
scanning when you select a channel/group that has Auto
Scan enabled.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
32
English
yellow LED blinks and the scan icon appears.
OR
The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled. The LED
turns off and the scan icon disappears.
While scanning, the radio can only accept data (e.g. text
message, location, telemetry, or PC data) if received on its
Selected Channel.
 Deleting a Nuisance Channel
During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group where
activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a
programmed time period known as “hang time”.
If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise
(termed a “nuisance” channel), you can temporarily remove the
unwanted channel from the scan list.
Procedure:
This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the
Selected Channel.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
you to respond.
2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The green LED
lights up.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
Procedure:
1 When your radio “locks on to” an unwanted or nuisance
channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete
button until you hear a tone.
2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button. The
nuisance channel is deleted.
Deleting a “nuisance” channel is only possible through the
programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. This feature is
not accessible through the menu.
4 Release the PTT button to listen.
 Restoring a Nuisance Channel
5 If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns
Procedure:
To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the
following:
to scanning other channels/groups.
Advanced Features
 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan
• Turn the radio off and then power it on again, OR
• Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan button or
menu, OR
• Change the channel via the Scroll Up/Down buttons.
33
English
Vote Scan
Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where
there are multiple base stations transmitting identical
information on different analog channels.
Contacts provides “address-book” capabilities on your radio.
Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate
a call.
Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and
performs a voting process to select the strongest received
signal. Once that is established, your radio unmutes to
transmissions from that base station.
Each entry, depending on context, associates with one of five
types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call or
Dispatch Call.
The yellow LED blinks and the vote scan icon appears on the
status bar.
Advanced Features
Contacts Settings
To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan, follow the
same procedures as Responding to a Transmission During a
Scan on page 33.
34
English
PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only
available with the applications. Refer to the data applications
documentation for further details.
NOTE: If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can
make privacy-enabled Group Call, Private Call, and All
Call on that channel. Only target radios with the same
Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and
Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the
transmission.
See Privacy on page 59 for more information.
Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a
programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If
an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a
quick dial on the entry.
Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
• Call Type
• Call Alias
• Call ID
NOTE: You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for the Digital
Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be
performed by your dealer.
For the Analog Contacts list, you can only view the
subscriber IDs, edit the subscriber IDs, and initiate a
Call Alert. Adding and deleting capabilities can only be
performed by your dealer.
 Making a Group Call from Contacts
Procedure:
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
6 Release the PTT button to listen. When any user in the
group responds, the green LED blinks. You see the Group
Call icon, the group alias or ID, and that user’s alias or ID
on your display.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond. Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time,
the call ends.
Advanced Features
Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analog contacts
and one for Digital contacts, with a a maximum of 500 members
for each Contacts list.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required group alias or ID.
35
English
 Making a Private Call from Contacts
the previous screen.
Procedure:
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio
presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If
the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone
and see negative mini notice on the display.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID.
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The display shows the destination alias.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
Advanced Features
6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
36
responds, the green LED blinks and the display shows the
transmitting user's alias or ID.
7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time,
the call ends.
8 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
NOTE: If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting
up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to
English
The radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the
radio presence check.
 Assigning an Entry to a Programmable
Number Key
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
4 f or h to Program Key and press g to select.
5 f or h to the desired number key and press g to
select.
OR
If the number key is currently assigned to another entry, the
display shows The Key is Already Used and then, the
first line of the display shows Overwrite?.
f or h to Yes and press g to select.
shows positive mini notice.
7 The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
NOTE: Each entry can be associated to different number keys.
You see a checkmark before each number key that is
assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty,
you have not assign a number key to the entry.
If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular
mode, this feature is not supported when you long
press the number key in another mode.
See Making a Group, Private or All Call with the
Programmable Number Key on page 83 for details on making
a Group, Private or All Call with the programmed number
key(s).
Programmable Number Key
Procedure:
Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or
ID, press g to select, and proceed to Step 4.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Advanced Features
6 The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display
 Removing the Association between Entry and
select.
4 f or h to Program Key and press g to select.
5 f or h to Empty and press g to select.
6 The first line of the display shows Clear from all keys?.
7 f or h to Yes and press g to select.
8 The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display
shows positive mini notice.
9 The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
NOTE: When an entry is deleted, the association between the
entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed.
37
English
 Setting Default Contact
Procedure:
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call
Alerts
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call
Alert.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Procedure:
select.
4 f or h to Set as Default and press g to select.
5 The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display
shows positive mini notice.
Advanced Features
Call Indicator Settings
6 A 9 appears beside the selected default alias or ID.
38
English
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
6 f or h to Call Alert and press g to select. The
current tone is indicated by a 9.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private
Calls
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private
Call.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
6 f or h to Selective Call and press g to select. The
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
6 f or h to Private Call.
7 Press g to enable Private Call ringing tones. The display
shows 9 beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Private Call ringing tones. The 9
disappears from beside Enabled.
current tone is indicated by a 9.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text
Message
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text
Message.
Advanced Features
Procedure:
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for
Selective Call
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received
Selective Call.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
Procedure:
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
6 f or h to Messages and press g to select. The
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
current tone is indicated by a 9.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
39
English
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for
Telemetry Status with Text
You can turn on or off the alert tones for a received Telemetry
Status with Text.
You can program your radio to sound one of ten predefined
ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert or a Text Message
from a particular contact.
Procedure:
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.The entries
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
Advanced Features
 Assigning Ring Styles
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
4 f or h to Edit and press g to select.
6 f or h to Telemetry and press g to select. The
5 Press g until display shows Edit Ringtone menu.
current tone is indicated by a 9.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
40
English
6 A 9 indicates the current selected tone.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
8 The display shows a positive mini notice.
The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through
the list.
 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume
Call Log Features
Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and
missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and
manage recent calls.
Procedure:
You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
1 g to access the menu.
• Store alias or ID to Contacts
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
• Delete
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
• View Details
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
 Viewing Recent Calls
5 f or h to Escalert.
The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.
6 Press g to enable Escalert. The display shows 9 beside
Procedure:
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Escalert. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
Advanced Features
You can program your radio to continually alert you when a
radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically
increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is
known as Escalert.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Call Log and press g to select.
3 f or h to preferred list and press g to select.
4 The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the
list.
5 f or h to view the list.
Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current
selected alias or ID.
41
English
 Deleting a Call from a Call List
 Viewing Details from a Call List
Procedure:
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Call Log and press g to select.
2 f or h to Call Log and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required list and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required list and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
5 f or h to Delete and press g to select.
Advanced Features
6 Press g to select Yes to delete the entry. The display
shows positive mini notice.
OR
f or h to No to return to the previous screen.
When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display
shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are
turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 81).
42
English
select.
5 f or h to View Details and press g to select.
Display shows details.
Call Alert Operation
This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and
is accessible through the menu via Contacts or manual dial.
 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert
When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the notification list
listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the
display.
Procedure:
1 You hear a repetitive tone. The yellow LED blinks.
2 Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call
Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call.
OR
Press g to exit the Notification List. The alert is moved to
the Missed Call Log.
See Notification List on page 68 for details about the
Notification List.
See Call Log Features on page 41 for details about the Missed
Call List.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
g to select.
4 f or h to Call Alert and press g to select.
5 The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or
ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent.
6 The green LED lights up when your radio is sending the Call
Advanced Features
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call
you back when they are able to do so.
 Making a Call Alert from the Contacts List
Alert.
7 If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display
shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the
display shows negative mini notice.
You can also send a Call Alert by manually dialing the
subscriber ID (see Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial on
page 88).
43
English
 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access
Button
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make
a Call Alert to the predefined alias or ID.
2 The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or
ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent.
3 The green LED lights up when your radio is sending the Call
Alert.
Advanced Features
4 If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display
shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the
display shows negative mini notice.
44
English
Emergency Operation
An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You
are able to initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen
display even when there is activity on the current channel.
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the
programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is
similar with all other buttons:
• Short press – Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds
• Long press – Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds
The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/ Off
feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of
the Emergency button.
If short press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the
Emergency mode, then long press the Emergency button is
assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
If long press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the
Emergency mode, then short press the Emergency button is
assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
• Emergency Alarm
• Emergency Alarm with Call
• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
In addition, each alarm has the following types:
2 Press e and select Yes to exit the Alarm List.
and/or visual indicators.
• Silent – Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or
visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound
through the radio’s speaker, until you press the PTT button to
initiate the call.
• Silent with Voice – Radio transmits an alarm signal without
any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to
sound through the radio’s speaker.
Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to
the programmed Emergency button or the Emergency
footswitch.
 Receiving an Emergency Alarm
Procedure:
1 The emergency icon appears, a tone sounds, the red LED
blinks, and the radio displays the Alarm List if there is more
than one alarm listed. The emergency caller aliases are
listed. f or h to the required alias and press g to view
more details. Press g again to view your action options.
OR
The emergency icon appears, a tone sounds, the red LED
blinks, and the radio displays the emergency caller alias
Press g to view more details. Press g again to view
your action options.
When your radio receives an Emergency Alarm, it displays the
Emergency Alarm received indications until acknowledgement
is sent (if enabled) and you exit the Emergency mode.
You are unable to receive any other indications or displays for
any other calls until you exit the Emergency Alarm received
screen.
The Emergency icon appears on the status bar if there are
undeleted emergency alarms in the Alarm List.
When your radio receives an Emergency Alarm, and you
change the radio channel, the Emergency Alarm list is hidden.
The new channel displays the Emergency icon and the red LED
blinks. When you change the radio channel back to the previous
channel, it also displays the Emergency icon and the red LED
blinks.
Advanced Features
To revisit the Alarm List, press g to access the menu and
select Alarm List.
• Regular – Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio
 Responding to an Emergency Alarm
Procedure:
When receiving an Emergency Alarm:
1 In the Alarm List, f or h to the required alias.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio
45
English
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
you to respond.
3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the
same group that the Emergency Alarm was targeted to. The
green LED lights up. Your radio remains in the Emergency
mode.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
Advanced Features
5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency
initiating radio responds, the green LED blinks. You see the
Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio
alias or ID on your display.
6 Your radio displays the Alarm List.
Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency
initiating radio. All other radios (including the emergency
receiving radio) transmit non-emergency voice.
46
English
 Sending an Emergency Alarm
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a
non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of
radios.
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the
Emergency footswitch.
2 The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The
green LED lights up and the Emergency icon appears.
OR
The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination
alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon
appears.
3 When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is received,
the Emergency tone sounds and the green LED blinks. The
display shows Alarm Sent.
OR
If your radio does not receive an Emergency Alarm
acknowledgement, and after all retries have been
exhausted, a tone sounds and the display shows Alarm
Failed.
4 Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the
Home screen.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or
visual indicators during Emergency mode.
 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
7 Release the PTT button to listen.
Procedure:
8 When the channel is free for you to respond, a short alert
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the
Emergency footswitch.
2 The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The
green LED lights up and the Emergency icon appears.
OR
The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination
alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon
appears.
3 When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is received,
the Emergency tone sounds and the green LED blinks. The
display shows Alarm Sent.
4 Your radio enters the emergency call mode when the display
shows Emergency and the destination group alias.
5 Press PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up
and the group icon appears on the display.
When you receive a group call, the display shows the caller
alias and group alias.
tone sounds (
if the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled). Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
Once your call ends, press Emergency Off button to exit
the Emergency mode.
9 The radio returns to the Home screen.
Advanced Features
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group
of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group,
the group of radios can communicate over a programmed
Emergency channel.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or
visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received
calls to sound through the radio’s speaker, until you press the
PTT button to initiate the call.
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any
audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, but allow
incoming calls to sound through the radio’s speaker. The
indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate,
or respond to, the call.
6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
47
English
 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to
Follow
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group
of radios. Your radio’s microphone is automatically activated,
allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without
pressing the PTT button.
This activated microphone state is also known as “hot mic”.
Advanced Features
If you press the PTT button during the programmed hot mic
transmission period, the radio ignores the PTT press and
remains in Emergency mode.
NOTE: If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and
continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires,
the radio continues to transmit until you release the
PTT button.
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the
Emergency footswitch.
2 The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The
green LED lights up and the Emergency icon appears.
OR
The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination
alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon
appears.
48
English
3 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the
microphone. When hot mic has been enabled, the radio
automatically transmits without a PTT press until the hot mic
duration expires.
4 While transmitting, the green LED lights up and the
Emergency icon appears.
5 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radio automatically
stops transmitting. To transmit again, press the PTT button.
6 Press Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode.
7 The radio returns to the Home screen.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or
visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received
calls to sound through the radio’s speaker, until the
programmed hot mic transmission period is over, and you press
the PTT button.
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any
audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when you
are making the call with hot mic, but allow sound through the
radio’s speaker when the target radio responds after the
programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators
only appear when you press the PTT button.
NOTE: If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does
not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic
state directly.
 Exiting Emergency Mode
NOTE: This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the
Emergency Alarm.
NOTE: This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the
Emergency Alarm.
There are two instances where this can happen:
Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of the following
occurs:
• You change the channel while the radio is in Emergency
mode. This exits the Emergency mode. If Emergency Alarm is
enabled on this new channel, the radio reinitiates Emergency.
• You press the programmed Emergency On button during an
Emergency initiation/transmission state. This causes the
radio to exit this state, and to reinitiate Emergency.
• Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received (for
Emergency Alarm only), OR
•
An Emergency Exit Telegram is received, OR
• All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted, OR
• The Emergency Off button is pressed.
Advanced Features
 Reinitiating an Emergency Mode
NOTE: If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency
mode. The radio does not reinitiate the Emergency
mode automatically when it is turned on again.
If you change channels when your radio is in
Emergency mode to a channel that has no emergency
system configured, No Emergency is shown on your
display.
49
English
Text Messaging Features
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message,
from another radio or an e-mail application.
 Sending a Quick Text Message
Your radio supports a maximum of 0 Quick Text messages as
programmed by your dealer.
Advanced Features
NOTE: While Quick Text messages are programmed, you can
edit each message before sending it. Only available
with a keypad microphone (see Editing a Quick Reply
Message on page 90).
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Quick Text and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required Quick Text and press g to
select.
5 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
50
select.
English
6 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
7 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51).
 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch
Access Button
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send
a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias or
ID.
2 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
3 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
3 f or h to Drafts and press g to select.
 Managing Text Messages in the Drafts Folder
 Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts
The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved
messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message
automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder.
See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 90 for more
information.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
NOTE: You can edit a saved text message before sending it.
Only available with a keypad microphone (see Editing
and Sending a Saved Text Message on page 91).
1 g to access the menu.
Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
 Viewing a Saved Text Message
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
Advanced Features
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51).
3 f or h to Drafts and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
5 Press g again while viewing the message.
6 f or h to Delete and press g to delete the text
message.
 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages
1 g to access the menu.
You can select one of the following options while at the Resend
option screen:
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
• Resend
• Forward
51
English
• Edit (Only available with a keypad microphone – see Editing
a Text Message on page 92 for more information)
NOTE: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity
Plus) is not a match, you can only edit and forward a
Fail-to-Send message.
 Resending a Text Message
Procedure:
1 Press g to resend the same message to the same
subscriber/group alias or ID.
Advanced Features
2 If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the message cannot be sent, the display shows negative
mini notice.
 Forwarding a Text Message
Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/
group alias or ID.
Procedure:
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
4 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
You can also manually select a target radio address (see
Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial on page 91).
 Managing Sent Text Messages
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent
Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to
the top of the Sent Items list.
The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of
thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next
sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text
message in the folder.
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
1 f or h to Forward and press g to select.
 Viewing a Sent Text Message
2 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
select.
52
English
OR
Follow the procedure below.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Sent Items and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
The icon beside each message indicates the status of the
message (see Sent Item Icons on page 12).
 Sending a Sent Text Message
You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent
text message:
• Resend
• Forward
• Edit
• Delete
NOTE: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity
Plus) is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or
delete a Sent message.
1 Press g again while viewing the message.
2 f or h to Resend and press g to select.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming that
the same message is being sent to the same target radio.
4 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen. Press g to resend the message to the
same subscriber/group alias or ID.
Advanced Features
1 g to access the menu.
Procedure:
NOTE: Changing the volume, and pressing any button, except
for g, f, or h, returns you to the message.
The radio exits the Resend option screen if you press
the PTT button to initiate a Private or Group Call, or to
respond to a Group Call. It also exits the screen when
the radio receives a text or telemetry message, an
emergency call or alarm, or a call alert.
The display returns to the Resend option screen if you
press the PTT button to respond to a Private Call
(except if the radio is displaying the Missed Call
screen), and at the end of an All Call.
53
English
Press f or h to access the Forward, Edit, or Delete
option screen:
• Select Forward to send the selected text message to another
target radio (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 52).
You can also manually select a target radio address using a
keypad microphone (see Forwarding a Text Message by
Manual Dial on page 91).
• Select Edit to edit the selected text message before sending
it (see Editing a Text Message on page 92). Only available
with a keypad microphone.
Advanced Features
• Select Delete to delete the text message.
NOTE: If you exit the message sending screen while the
message is being sent, the radio updates the status of
the message in the Sent Items folder without providing
any indication in the display or via sound.
54
English
If the radio changes mode or powers down before the
status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the
radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and
automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.
The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress
messages at one time. During this period, the radio
cannot send any new message and automatically
marks it with a Send Failed icon.
 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Sent Items and press g to select.
4 f or h to Delete All and press g to select.
5 f or h to Yes and press g to select. The display
shows positive mini notice
OR
f or h to No and press g to return to the previous
screen.
When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages,
the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if
Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On
or Off on page 81).
 Receiving a Text Message
You can select one of the following options when receiving a
text message:
• Read
• Select Read Later to return to the screen you were on prior
to receiving the text message.
• Select Delete to delete the text message.
 Managing Received Text Messages
• Read Later
Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is
capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages.
• Delete
Your radio supports the following options for text messages:
NOTE: The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets
up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the
message if the PTT button is pressed when the radio is
displaying the alert screen.
• Reply (via Quick Text)
 Reading a Text Message
• Delete All
Procedure:
NOTE: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity
Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or
delete all Received messages.
1 f or h to Read and press g to select.
2 Selected message in the Inbox opens.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
3 Press e to return to the Inbox.
OR
Press g to reply, forward, or delete the text message.
Advanced Features
When your radio receives a message, the display shows the
Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the
message icon.
Press f or h to access the Read Later or Delete option
screen:
• Forward
• Delete
Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the
most recently received.
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
55
English
 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox
6 Long press e to return to the Home screen.
Procedure:
You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to view the messages.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
Advanced Features
5 Press g to select the current message, and press g
again to reply, forward, or delete that message.
OR
Long press e to return to the Home screen.
 Replying to a Text Message with Quick Text
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
 Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from the
Inbox
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
Procedure:
5 Press g once more to access the sub-menu.
1 g to access the menu.
6 f or h to Reply and press g to select.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
7 f or h to Quick Reply and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
8 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
9 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
5 The display shows Telemetry: .
56
English
message is being sent.
10 If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51).
NOTE: If you are using a keypad microphone, you can also
write and send a new message (see Writing and
Sending a Text Message on page 88) or modify a
Quick Text message before sending it (see Editing a
Quick Reply Message on page 90).
 Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
Advanced Features
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the message cannot be sent, the display shows negative
mini notice.
5 Press g once more to access the sub-menu.
6 f or h to Delete and press g to select.
7 f or h to Yes and press g to select.
8 The display shows positive mini notice.
9 The screen returns to the Inbox.
57
English
 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to Delete All and press g to select.
Advanced Features
5 f or h to Yes and press g to select.
6 The display shows positive mini notice.
When you select the Inbox and it contains no text messages,
the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if
Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On
or Off on page 81).
NOTE: Additional text messaging features are available with a
keypad-enabled microphone. Refer to Text Messaging
on page 88 for more details.
58
English
Analog Message Encode
Your radio is able to send preprogrammed messages from the
Message list to a radio alias or to the dispatcher.
 Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Message and press g to select.
3 f or h to Quick Text and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message. Press g to send.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
6 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Analog Status Update
The last acknowledged message is kept at the top of the Status
List. The other messages are arranged in alphanumeric order.
If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by
unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a softwarebased scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification
portions of a transmission are not scrambled.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a
privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary
requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacyenabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear
(unscrambled) transmissions.
2 f or h to Status and press g to select.
Your radio supports two types of privacy:
3 f or h to the required status. Press g to select.
• Basic Privacy
4 f or h to Set as Default. Press g to send the
• Enhanced Privacy.
 Sending Status Update to Predefined Contact
status update.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
status update is being sent.
6 If the status update is acknowledged, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice. A 9 appears beside the
acknowledged status.
OR
If the status update is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice. A 9 remains
beside the previous status.
Advanced Features
Your radio is able to send preprogrammed messages from the
Status List indicating your current activity to the dispatcher.
Privacy
Only ONE of the privacy types above can be assigned to the
radio.
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your
radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key (for
Basic Privacy), OR the same Key Value and Key ID (for
Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio.
If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different
Privacy Key, OR a different Key Value and Key ID, you will
either hear a garbled transmission (Basic Privacy) or nothing at
all (Enhanced Privacy).
59
English
The green LED lights up while the radio is transmitting and
double blinks when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacyenabled transmission.
NOTE: Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or
off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
Advanced Features
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Privacy.
5 Press g to enable Privacy. The display shows 9 beside
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Privacy. The 9 disappears from beside
Enabled.
If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure or unsecure
icon appears on the status bar, except when the radio is
sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm.
60
English
IP Site Connect
This feature allows your radio to extend communication beyond
the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available
sites via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the
range of another, it connects to the new site's base station to
send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your
settings, this is done automatically or manually.
If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all
available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or
when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current
site. It then locks on to the base station with the strongest
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value.
In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in
the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have
the strongest signal) and locks on to it.
NOTE: Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam
enabled, not both at the same time.
Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular
roam list. The radio searches the channel(s) in the Members list
during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site.
A Members list supports a maximum of 16 channels (including
the Selected Channel).
4 f or h to Site Roaming and press g to select.
 Starting an Automatic Site Search
6 The radio returns to the Home screen. The display shows
NOTE: The radio only scans for a new site if the current signal
is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal
from the current site. If the RSSI value is strong, the
radio remains on the current site.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button.
1 A tone sounds and the display shows Site Unlocked.
2 The yellow LED blinks rapidly when the radio is actively
searching for a new site, and turns off once the radio locks
on to a site.
3 The display shows the channel alias and the site roaming
icon appears.
OR
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
5 f or h to Unlock Site and press g to select. A tone
sounds and the display shows Site Unlocked.
the channel alias and the site roaming icon appears.
7 The yellow LED blinks rapidly when the radio is actively
searching for a new site, and turns off once the radio locks
on to a site.
The radio also performs an automatic site search (site is
unlocked) during a PTT button press or data transmission if
the current channel, an IP Site Select channel with an attached
roam list, is out of range.
Advanced Features
NOTE: You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the
Members list. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
 Stopping an Automatic Site Search
When the radio is actively searching for a new site:
Procedure:
Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button.
1 A tone sounds and the display shows Site Locked.
2 The LED turns off and the display shows the channel alias.
OR
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
61
English
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Site Roaming and press g to select.
5 f or h to Lock Site State.
6 Press g to lock site. The display shows 9 beside Enabled.
Advanced Features
OR
Press g to unlock site. The 9 disappears from beside
Enabled.
7 The LED turns off and the radio returns to the Home screen.
The display shows the channel alias.
 Starting a Manual Site Search
Procedure:
Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button and proceed
to Step 6.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
62
English
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Site Roaming and press g to select.
5 f or h to Active Search and press g to select.
6 A tone sounds and the display shows Finding Site.
The green LED blinks.
7 If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LED turns off.
The display shows Site  Found.
OR
If there is no available site within range, a tone sounds and
the LED turns off. The display shows Out of Range.
OR
If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to
connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The
display shows Channel Busy.
8 The radio returns to the Home screen.
Security
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
NOTE: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to
radios with these functions enabled.
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
 Radio Disable
4 f or h to Radio Disable and press g to select.
Procedure:
Use the programmed Radio Disable button.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
2 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
7 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
g to select.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED blinks.
4 Wait for acknowledgment.
5 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
g to select.
request is in progress. The green LED blinks.
Advanced Features
You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example,
you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief
from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered.
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Do not press e during the Radio Disable operation as you will
not get an acknowledgement message.
You can also access this feature using manual dial (see Radio
Disable via Manual Dial on page 93).
OR
63
English
 Radio Enable
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
Procedure:
Use the programmed Radio Enable button.
4 f or h to Radio Enable and press g to select. The
1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button.
2 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
g to select.
3 The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias
or ID. The green LED lights up.
4 Wait for acknowledgment.
Advanced Features
5 If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and
the display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone
and the display shows negative mini notice.
g to select.
green LED blinks.
5 The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias
or ID. The green LED lights up.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
7 If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Radio
Enable Successful.
OR
If not successful, a tone sounds and the display shows
Radio Enable Failed.
Do not press e during the Radio Enable operation as you will
not get an acknowledgement message.
You can also access this feature using manual dial (see Radio
Enable via Manual Dial on page 93).
OR
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
64
English
Lone Worker
Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio
pre-warns the user via an audio indicator once the inactivity
timer expires.
If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before the
predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an
Emergency Alarm.
Only one of the following Emergency Alarms is assigned to this
feature:
• Emergency Alarm
• Emergency Alarm with Call
• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
The radio remains in the emergency state allowing voice
messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency
Operation on page 44 on ways to exit Emergency.
NOTE: This feature is limited to radios with this function
enabled. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
NOTE:
This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetoothenabled device (accessory) via a Bluetooth connection. Your
radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially
available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters line of sight.
This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your
Bluetooth-enabled device.
It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and
expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high
degree of reliability when they are separated.
At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will
start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem,
simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer
to each other (within the 10-meter defined range) to re-establish
clear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth function has a
maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-meter range.
Advanced Features
This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no
user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the
channel selector, for a predefined time.
Bluetooth
Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneous Bluetooth
connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types.
For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device
(POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of
the same type are not supported.
Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s user
manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device’s full
capabilities.
65
English
 Turning Bluetooth On or Off
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Bluetooth and press g to select.
3 f or h to My Status and press g to select.
4 The display shows On and Off. f or h to On and press
g to enable Bluetooth. 9 appears beside On. The
Advanced Features
Bluetooth icon appears on the status bar.
OR
The display shows On and Off. f or h to Off and press
g to disable Bluetooth. 9 appears beside Off.
 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device
Procedure:
1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in
pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled
device’s user manual.
2 On your radio, press g to access the menu.
3 f or h to Bluetooth and press g to select.
4 f or h to Devices and press g to select.
5 f or h to the required device and press g to select.
66
OR
English
f or h to Find Devices to locate available devices.
f or h to the required device and press g to select.
6 f or h to Connect and press g to select. Display
shows Connecting to .
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps
to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetoothenabled device’s user manual.
7 If successful, the radio display shows 
Connected. A tone sounds and 9 appears beside the
connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears
on the status bar.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting
Failed.
Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press e
during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels the
operation.
NOTE: If pin code is required, use the same entry method as
Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on
page 94.
 Switching Audio Route
Procedure:
You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker
and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
1 On your radio, press g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Bluetooth and press g to select.
3 f or hto Devices and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required device and press g to select.
5 f or hto Disconnect and press g to select. Display
shows Disconnecting from .
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps
to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled
device’s user manual.
6 The radio display shows  Disonnected. A
positive indicator tone sounds and 9 disappears beside the
connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon
disappears on the status bar.
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button .
2 A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio.
OR
A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to
Bluetooth.
 Viewing Device Details
Advanced Features
 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Bluetooth and press g to select.
3 f or h to Devices and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required device and press g to select.
5 f or h to View Details and press g to select.
67
English
Notification List
Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your “unread”
events on the channel, such as unread text messages,
telegrams, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call alerts.
The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the
Notification List has one or more events.
The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread events. When
it is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event.
Advanced Features
After the events are read, they are removed from the
Notification List.
NOTE: Your radio suspends Scan when the Notification List is
displayed. Scanning resumes when your radio exits the
Notification List. Press e to exit the Notification List
or wait for the menu timer to expire.
Accessing the Notification List
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Notification and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required event and press g to select.
Long press e to return to the Home screen.
68
English
Utilities
 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off
You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts (except for
the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed.
Procedure:
Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all
tones on or off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to All Tones and press g to select.
6 Press g to enable all tones. The display shows 9 beside
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable all tones. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to Vol. Offset and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to Talk Permit and press g to select.
6 Press g to enable Talk Permit Tone. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Talk Permit Tone. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
Advanced Features
You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed.
This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to
be higher or lower than the voice volume.
Procedure:
6 f or h to the required volume value. The radio sounds a
feedback tone with each corresponding volume value.
7 Press g to keep the required displayed volume value.
OR
Repeat Step 6 to select another volume value.
OR
e to exit without changing the current volume offset
settings.
 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off
You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed.
 Setting the Power Level
You can customize your radio’s power setting to high or low for
each channel.
Settings: High enables communication with radios located at
a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication
with radios in closer proximity.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit
power level between high and low.
69
English
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Power and press g to select.
5 f or h to the required setting and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected setting.
Advanced Features
4 f or h to Day/Night and press g to select.
5 The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. f or h
to the required setting and press g to enable. 9 appears
beside selected setting.
 Adjusting the Display Brightness
You can adjust radio’s display brightness as needed.
Long press e to return to the Home screen. The power level
icon is visible.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Brightness button and proceed to
Step 5.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
 Changing the Display Mode
1 g to access the menu.
You can change radio’s display mode between Day or Night, as
needed. This affects the colorcolour palette of the display.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
6 Screen returns to the previous menu.
70
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Display Mode button to toggle the
display mode settings.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
English
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Brightness and press g to select.
5 The display shows a progress bar. Decrease display
brightness by pressing h or increase the display
brightness by pressing f. Press g to confirm your entry.
 Turning the Public Address System On or Off
Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns
and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds
your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights.
You can enable and disable the radio’s internal public address
(PA) system.
This feature needs to be installed through your radio’s rear
accessory connector by your dealer.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns
and lights feature on or off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Horns/Lights and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable Horns/Lights. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Horns/Lights. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled
Procedure:
Press the programmed PA On/Off button to toggle the feature
on or off.
 Turning the External Public Address System On
or Off
You can enable or disable the audio routing between the
connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the
radio’s internal public address (PA) system.
Advanced Features
 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off
Procedure:
Press the programmed Ext PA On/Off button to toggle the
feature on or off.
 Setting the Squelch Level
You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter out unwanted
calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher
than normal background noise.
Settings: Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted)
calls and/or background noise. However, calls from remote
locations may also be filtered out.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Squelch button to toggle squelch level
71
English
between normal and tight.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Squelch and press g to select.
5 The display shows Tight and Normal. f or h to the
required setting and press g to enable. 9 appears
besides selected setting.
Advanced Features
6 Screen returns to the previous menu.
 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off
You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Intro Screen and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable Introduction Screen. The display shows
72
9 beside Enabled.
English
OR
Press g to disable Introduction Screen. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
 Turning the LED Indicators On or Off
You can enable and disable the LED Indicators if needed.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to LED Indicator and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable LED indicator. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable LED indicator. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Dual Knob and press g to select.
5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume & Ch.
f or h to the required setting and press g to enable.
9 appears besides selected setting.
6 Screen returns to the previous menu.
Feature On or Off
This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voice activated
call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically
transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone
on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice.
NOTE: You may need to turn off the radio and power it up
again after detaching the VOX-capable microphone
from it to allow the radio to switch to another valid
accessory.
Pressing the PTT button during radio operation disables VOX.
To re-enable VOX, do one of the following:
• Turn the radio off and power it on again, OR
• Change the channel via the Scroll Up/Down buttons, OR
 Language
• Change the channel via the Volume/Channel Knob, OR
You can set your radio display to be in your required language.
• Follow the procedure below.
Procedure:
NOTE: Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with
this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
Advanced Features
Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel Knob.
Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the knob to work as a
Volume Knob only.
 Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)
3 f or h to Language and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required language and press g to
enable. 9 appears beside selected language.
73
English
Advanced Features
Procedure:
Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the feature on or
off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Option Board Feature button to toggle
the feature on or off.
1 g to access the menu.
You can select the type of cable your radio uses.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
Procedure:
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
4 f or h to VOX and press g to select.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable VOX. The display shows 9 beside
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable VOX. The 9 disappears from beside
Enabled.
If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see Turning the Talk
Permit Tone On or Off on page 69), use a trigger word to
initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before
speaking clearly into the microphone.
 Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off
Option board capabilities within each channel and can be
assigned to programmable buttons. Refer to your dealer or
system administrator for more information.
 Identifying Cable Type
4 f or h to Cable Type and press g to select.
5 The current cable type is indicated by a 9.
 Voice Announcement
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current
Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable
button press. This audio indicator can be customized per
customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is
in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display.
Use the following features to toggle Voice Announcement on or
off.
Procedure:
74
English
Press g to disable Call Forwarding. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
1 g to access the menu.
 Menu Timer
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it
automatically switches to the Home screen.
3 f or h to Voice Announcement.
4 Press g to enable Voice Announcement. The display
shows 9 beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Voice Announcement. The 9
disappears from beside Enabled.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Menu Timer and press g to select.
 Call Forwarding
You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls
to another radio.
Procedure:
5 f or h to the required setting and press g to enable.
 Analog Mic AGC
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
automatically while transmitting on an analog system. It
suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in
order to provide a consistent level of audio.
3 f or h to Call Forward.
Procedure:
4 Press g to enable Call Forwarding. The display shows 9
1 g to access the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
beside Enabled.
OR
Advanced Features
Press the programmed Voice Announcement button.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
75
English
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
 Intelligent Audio
4 f or h to Analog Mic AGC.
Your radio automatically adjusts its audio volume to overcome
current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both
stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a
Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio.
5 Press g to enable Analog Mic AGC. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Analog Mic AGC. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
Advanced Features
 Digital Mic AGC
This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
automatically while transmitting on an digital system. It
suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in
order to provide a consistent level of audio.
Procedure:
Use the following features to toggle Intelligent Audio on or off.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button to toggle the
feature on or off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
4 f or h to Intelligent Audio.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable Intelligent Audio. The display shows 9
4 f or h to Digital Mic AGC.
5 Press g to enable Digital Mic AGC. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Digital Mic AGC. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
76
English
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Intelligent Audio. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
 Accessing General Radio Information
Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite navigation
system that determines the radio’s precise location.
Your radio contains information on the following:
Procedure:
Press the programmed GPS button to toggle the feature on or
off.
OR
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
• Radio Alias and ID
• Firmware and Codeplug Versions
• GPS Information
NOTE: Press e at any time to return to the previous screen
or long press e to return to the Home screen. The
radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer
expires.
4 f or h to GPS.
 Checking the Radio Alias and ID
5 Press g to enable GPS. The display shows 9 beside
Displays the ID of your radio.
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable GPS. The 9 disappears from beside
Enabled.
See Checking the GPS Information on page 78 for details on
retrieving GPS information.
Advanced Features
 GPS
Procedure:
Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to check your
radio alias and ID. You hear a positive indicator tone.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Info and press g to select.
4 f or h to My Number and press g to select.
77
English
5 The first line of the display shows the radio alias. The
second line of the display shows the radio ID.
Displays the GPS information on your radio, such as values of:
You can also press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button
to return to the previous screen.
• Latitude
 Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
• Altitude
Version
Displays the firmware and codeplug versions on your radio.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
Advanced Features
 Checking the GPS Information
3 f or h to Radio Info and press g to select.
4 f or h to Versions and press g to select.
The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions.
78
English
• Longitude
• Direction
• Velocity
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
• Satellites
• Version
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Info and press g to select.
4 f or h to GPS Info and press g to select.
5 f or h to the required item and press g to select.
6 The display shows the requested GPS information.
See GPS on page 77 for details on GPS.
Keypad Microphone Features
Using the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Lock Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Configuration (FPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 80
page 81
page 88
page 92
page 93
page 94
page 96
Keypad Microphone Features
The following additional features for your radio are available
with a keypad-enabled microphone:
79
English
Using the Keypad
You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola part number RMN5127_) to
access your radio’s features. You can use the keypad to enter subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require
that you press a key multiple times. The table below shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required
character.
Keypad Microphone Features
Number of Times Key is Pressed
80
Key
10
11
12
13
‘
* or del
# or space
English
NOTE: Press to enter “0” and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock.
NOTE: Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a “*”.
NOTE: Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a “#”.
 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off
Additional Advanced Features
Procedure:
 Selecting a Zone by Alias Search
1 g to access the menu.
Procedure:
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
2 f or h to Zone and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
3 The current zone is displayed and indicated by a 9.
5 f or h to Keypad Tones and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required zone and proceed to Step 7.
6 Press g to enable keypad tones. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable keypad tones. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
OR
Key in the first character of the required zone.
5 A blinking cursor appears.
Use the keypad to type the required zone.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
Keypad Microphone Features
You can enable and disable Keypad Tones if needed.
6 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
zones with the same name, the radio displays the zone that
is listed first in the zone list.
7 Press g to select.
81
English
8 The display shows  Selected momentarily and
returns to the selected zone screen.
 Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial
9 Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
If the e button is pressed when the radio is waiting for
acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and the radio terminates all
retries and exits Radio Check mode.
Procedure:
Keypad Microphone Features
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
4 If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with
a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press g to
select.
OR
Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press g.
5 f or h to Radio Check and press g to select.
6 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
7 Wait for acknowledgement.
8 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
82
English
 Initiating Remote Monitor by Manual Dial
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
4 If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with
a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press g to
select.
OR
Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press g.
5 f or h to Remote Mon. and press g to select.
6 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
7 Wait for acknowledgment.
8 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing
audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration
and display shows Rem. Monitor.
 Making a Private Call by Manual Dial
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
4 If there is a previously dialed subscriber ID, the ID appears
along with a blinking cursor.
Use the keypad to edit the subscriber ID.
OR
Use the keypad to enter a new subscriber ID.
5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The display shows the destination alias.
6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
responds, the green LED blinks.
8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time,
the call ends.
9 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
 Making a Group, Private or All Call with the
Programmable Number Key
The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to make a
Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This
feature can be assigned to all the available number keys on a
keypad microphone.
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a number key,
but you can have more than one number key associated to an
alias or ID.
Keypad Microphone Features
Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and
the LED turns off.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone
the display shows negative mini notice.
Procedure:
When you are on the Home screen:
1 Long press the programmed number key to make a Group,
Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID.
If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative
indicator tone sounds.
83
English
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Group/Private Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second
text line displays either the call status for a Private Call or
All Call for All Call.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
Keypad Microphone Features
clearly into the microphone.
OR
84
For Group Call only: Wait for the PTT Sidetone to
finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
 Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias
Search
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the
required subscriber alias.
This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
responds, the green LED blinks. The display shows the
destination alias.
3 Key in the first character of the required alias.
5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
6 Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the
call.
For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends.
See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key on
page 36 for details on assigning an entry to a number key on
the keypad.
English
4 A blinking cursor appears.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
5 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that
is listed first in the Contacts list.
6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The first line displays the target radio’s ID.
clearly into the microphone
8 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
responds, the green LED blinks. The display shows the
destination alias.
9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time,
the call ends.
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
6 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that is
listed first in the scan list.
 Editing the Scan List by Alias Search
10 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
 Adding a New Entry to the Scan List
NOTE: Press e button or g to exit alias search.
Procedure:
 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 Key in the first character of the required alias.
1 g to access the menu.
Keypad Microphone Features
7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
5 A blinking cursor appears.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 f or h to Add Member and press g to select.
5 Key in the first character of the required alias.
6 A blinking cursor appears.
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
85
English
Press < to move one space to the left.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
Keypad Microphone Features
7 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that
is listed first in the list.
8 Press g to select.
9 f or h to the required priority level and press g to
select.
10 The display shows positive mini notice, followed
immediately by Add Another?.
11 f or h to Yes and press g to select, to add another
entry, and repeat Steps 5 to 9.
OR
f or h to No and press g to select to save the current
list.
 Deleting an Entry from the Scan List
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
86
English
4 Key in the first character of the required alias.
5 A blinking cursor appears.
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
6 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that
is listed first in the scan list.
7 Press g to select.
8 f or h to Delete and press g to select.
9 At Delete Entry?, f or h to Yes and press g to
select, to delete the entry. The display shows positive mini
notice.
OR
f or h to No and press g to select to return to the
previous screen.
10 Repeat Steps 4 to 9 to delete other entries.
After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press e to
return to the Home screen.
List
Procedure:
select.
10 The display shows positive mini notice before returning to
the previous screen.
11 The priority icon appears left of the member’s name.
1 g to access the menu.
There is no priority icon if priority is set to None.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
 Storing an Alias or ID from a Call List
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
Procedure:
4 Key in the first character of the required alias.
1 g to access the menu.
5 A blinking cursor appears.
2 f or h to Call Log and press g to select.
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
3 f or h to the required list and press g to select.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Press < to move one space to the left.
6 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that
is listed first in the scan list.
7 Press g to select.
8 f or h to Edit Priority and press g to select.
select.
5 f or h to Store and press g to select.
Keypad Microphone Features
 Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan
9 f or h to the required priority level and press g to
6 A blinking cursor appears. If needed, key in the alias for that
ID and press g.
7 The display shows positive mini notice.
You can also store an ID without an alias.
87
English
 Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Keypad Microphone Features
4 A blinking cursor appears. Enter the subscriber ID you want
to send the Call Alert to and press g.
5 f or h to Call Alert and press g to select.
6 The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or
ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent.
7 The green LED lights up when your radio is sending the Call
Alert.
8 If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display
shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the
display shows negative mini notice.
Text Messaging
The maximum length of characters for a text message,
including the subject line (seen when receiving message from
an e-mail application), is 140, whereas to receive would be a
maximum of 280 characters.
The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer
expires. Any text message in the writing/editing screen is
automatically be saved to the Drafts folder.
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
 Writing and Sending a Text Message
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Compose and press g to select.
4 Use the keypad to type your message.
Press < to move one space to the left.
88
English
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the * key to delete any unwanted characters.
6 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
OR
f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
OR
e to edit the message.
e again to discard the message or save it to the Drafts
folder.
7 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
8 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51 and page 91).
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
5 Press g once more to access additional options.
6 f or h to Reply and press g to select.
A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type your
message.
Keypad Microphone Features
5 Press g once message is composed.
 Replying to Text Messages from the Inbox
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the * key to delete any unwanted characters.
7 Press g once message is composed.
8 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
89
English
9 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Keypad Microphone Features
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51 and page 91).
NOTE: If a subject line is present (for messages received from
an e-mail application), you cannot edit it.
 Editing a Quick Reply Message
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the * key to delete any unwanted characters.
6 Press g once message is composed.
7 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
8 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51 and page 91).
1 g to access the menu.
You can save a text message to send it at a later time.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit
the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the
process of writing or editing a text message, your current text
message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder.
3 f or h to Quick Reply and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required Quick Text and press g to
select.
5 A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the
90
Press < to move one space to the left.
message.
English
 Accessing the Drafts Folder
The most recent saved text message is always added to the top
of the Drafts list. See Managing Text Messages in the Drafts
Folder on page 51 for more information.
If the text message fails to send, it is moved to the Sent Items
folder and marked with a Send Failed icon.
 Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message
 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages
Procedure:
if the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend
option screen.
1 Press g again while viewing the message.
2 f or h to Edit and press g to select.
A blinking cursor appears.
Use the keypad to edit your message.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
Press g once message is composed.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
OR
f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press g.
4 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
5 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
 Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial
Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/
group alias or ID.
Procedure:
1 f or h to Forward and press g to select.
2 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
Keypad Microphone Features
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
4 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
91
English
 Editing a Text Message
Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.
NOTE: If a subject line is present (for messages received from
an e-mail application), you cannot edit it.
6 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Procedure:
Keypad Microphone Features
1 f or h to Edit and press g to select.
2 A blinking cursor appears beside the message.
Use the keypad to edit your message.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
3 Press g once message is composed.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
OR
f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
92
English
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)
The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio
to operate in a radio system with an interface to telephone
systems.
Procedure:
To initiate a DTMF call.
1 Press and hold the PTT button.
2 Enter the desired number, * or #.
You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and
alerts (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on
page 68).
Security
 Radio Enable via Manual Dial
1 g to access the menu.
Procedure:
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
4 f or h to Radio Disable and press g to select.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED blinks.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
7 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
4 f or h to Radio Enable and press g to select.
5 The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias
or ID. The LED lights up solid green.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
7 If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and
the display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone
and the display shows negative mini notice.
Keypad Microphone Features
Procedure:
 Radio Disable via Manual Dial
Do not press e during the Radio Enable operation as you will
not get an acknowledgement message.
Do not press e during the Radio Disable operation as you
will not get an acknowledgement message.
93
English
Password Lock Features
If enabled, this feature allows you to access your radio via
password upon powering up. You can use a keypad microphone
or Scroll Up/Down buttons to enter password.
Keypad Microphone Features
 Accessing the Radio from Password
Procedure:
Power up the radio.
1 You hear a continuous tone.
2 Enter your current four-digit password via keypad
microphone.
The display shows ●●●●. Press g to proceed.
OR
Enter your current four-digit password. Press f or h to
edit each digit’s numeric value and g to enter the selected
digit and move to the next digit. Each digit changes to ●.
Press g to confirm your selection.
You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit pressed.
Press < to remove the each ● on the display. You hear a
negative indicator tone, if you press < when the line is
empty, or if you press more than four digits.
94
English
3 If the password is correct:
Your radio proceeds to power up. See Powering Up the
Radio on page 2.
OR
If the password is incorrect:
The display shows Wrong Password. Repeat Step 2.
OR
After the third incorrect password, the display shows
Wrong Password and then, shows Radio Locked. A tone
sounds and the yellow LED double blinks.
Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes, and responds
to inputs from On/Off button and programmed Backlight Auto
button only.
NOTE: The radio is unable to receive any call, including
emergency calls, in locked state.
The use of Emergency footswitch cancels out
password input to access the radio.
 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State
1 A tone sounds and the yellow LED double blinks. The
display shows Radio Locked.
2 Wait for 15 minutes. Repeat Accessing the Radio from
Password on page 94.
Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when
you power up.
 Turning the Password Lock On or Off
Procedure:
Press g to enable Password Lock. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Password Lock. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
OR
If the password is incorrect:
The display shows Wrong Password and automatically
returns to the previous menu.
 Changing the Password
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
4 f or h to Passwd Lock and press g to select.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
5 Enter your current four-digit password via keypad
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Passwd Lock and press g to select.
5 Enter a four-digit password.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on
page 94.
Keypad Microphone Features
Procedure:
Wait for 15 minutes. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 in Accessing the
Radio from Password on page 94.
OR
Power up the radio, if you have powered down the radio during
locked state:
6 If the password is correct:
microphone.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on
page 94.
6 If the password is correct:
f or h to Change Pwd and press g to select.
OR
If the password is incorrect:
95
English
The display shows Wrong Password and automatically
returns to the previous menu.
7 Enter a new four-digit password via keypad microphone.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on
page 94.
8 Re-enter the new four-digit password. See Step 2 in
Keypad Microphone Features
Accessing the Radio from Password on page 94.
9 If both of the new password inputs match:
The display shows Password Changed.
OR
If both of the new password inputs do not match:
The display shows Passwords Do Not Match.
10 The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
96
English
Front Panel Configuration (FPC)
Your radio is able to customize certain feature parameters to
enhance the use of your radio.
 Entering FPC Mode
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Program Radio and press g to select.
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
 Editing FPC Mode Parameters
Use the following buttons as required while navigating through
the feature parameters.
f, h, <, > – Scroll through options, increase/decrease
values, or navigate vertically
g – Select the option or enter a sub-menu
e – Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the
selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen.
• UHF, 403 – 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Accessories
Mini-U (HAE4002_)
Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desktop Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 97
page 98
page 98
page 99
page 99
page 99
page 99
• UHF, 406 – 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAE4010_)
• UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U
(HAE4003_)
• UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain , Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAE4011_)
• UHF, 445 – 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount,
Accessories
Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed in this
chapter. Contact your dealer for details.
Mini-U (with base) (RAE4004_RB)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 136 – 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4214_)
Antennas
• VHF, 136 – 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4006_)
• VHF, 146 – 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4007_)
• VHF, 150.8 – 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4008_)
• VHF, 162 – 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4009_)
• VHF, 132-174 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4022_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 146 – 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4215_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 150.8 – 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4216_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 162 – 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4217_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 146 – 172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4218_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 403 – 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6019_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 403 – 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4030_)
97
English
• Combination GPS/UHF, 406 – 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4032_)
• Fixed Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4000_)
• Window Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4001_)
• Magnetic Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4002_)
Audio
• Telephone Style Handset (HMN4098_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-meter) Cable, 15 amp
(1 – 25 Watt) (HKN4137_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-meter) Cable, 20 amp
(1 – 45 Watt) (HKN4191_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 20-foot (6-meter) Cable, 20 amp
(1 – 45 Watt) (HKN4192_)
• Mobile and Repeater Rear Accessory Connector Universal
Cable (PMKN4018_)
• Desktop Microphone (RMN5050_)
• Ignition Sense Cable (RKN4136_)
• Compact Microphone (RMN5052_)
• Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 10 feet (PMKN4033_)
• IMPRES 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (RMN5127_)
• Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 20 feet (PMKN4034_)
• Heavy Duty Microphone with Enhanced Audio (RMN5053_)
• Visor Microphone with Enhanced Audio (RMN5054_)
Accessories
Cables
• Operations Critical Wireless earpiece, 12" Cable
(NNTN8125_)
• Operations Critical Wireless earpiece, 9.5" Cable
(NNTN8126_)
• Operations Critical Wireless Push-to-Talk POD (NNTN8127_)
• HK200 Bluetooth Headset (89409N)
98
English
Desktop Accessories
Desktop Tray without Speaker (GLN7318_)
Desktop Tray with Speaker (RSN4005_)
• PL259/Mini-U Antenna Adapter, 8-foot (2.4-meter) Cable
(HKN9557_)
US Line Cord (3060665A04)
• Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones) (HLN9073_)
Switchmode Power Supply 1–25 Watt Models (GPN6145_)
• Universal Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones)
Radio Power Cable for GPN6145_ (GKN6266_)
Power Supply and Cable (HPN4007_)
• Hardware Kit for Rear Accessory Connector (PMLN5072_)
(HLN9414_)
• Push Button PTT (RLN5926_)
Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
Miscellaneous Accessories
• Emergency Footswitch (RLN5929_)
Mounting Kits
• In Dash (DIN) Mounting Kit (RLN6465_)
• Low Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6466_)
• High Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6467_)
• Key Lock Trunnion Kit (RLN6468_)
Speakers
• 13-Watt External Speaker (RSN4002_)
• 7.5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4003_)
• 5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4004_)
99
English
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the
VHF Frequency Range
Take a moment to review the following:
Special Channel Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 100
Operating Frequency Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 101
Special Channel Assignments
 Emergency Channel
If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require
emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress
call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard.
Transmit the following information, in this order:
“MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY.”
“THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN
__________.”
State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed
by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3
times.
Repeat “MAYDAY” and the name of the vessel.
100
English
“WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________.”
State the position of the vessel in distress, using any
information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:
• latitude and longitude
• bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic
north)
• distance to a well-known landmark
• vessel course, speed or destination
5 State the nature of the distress.
6 Specify what kind of assistance you need.
7 State the number of persons on board and the number
needing medical attention, if any.
8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to
responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or
tonnage, hull color, etc.
9 “OVER.”
10 Wait for a response.
11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the
radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you
receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions
given to you.
 Non-Commercial Call Channel
For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports,
rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing
information, use VHF Channel 9.
Operating Frequency Requirements
• on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications
Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800
MHz frequency
• on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be
capable of operating:
• in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting
frequencies specified in the 156.025 – 157.425 MHz
frequency band, and
• in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels
specified in the table below.
NOTE: Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83
cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US
waters.
Additional information about operating requirements in the
Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC
Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard.
Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List
Frequency (MHz)
Channel
Number
Transmit
Receive
156.050
160.650
Frequency (MHz)
Channel
Number
Transmit
Receive
10
11
12
13**
14
15**
16
17**
18
19
20
22
156.100
156.150
156.200
156.250
156.300
156.350
156.400
156.450
156.500
156.550
156.600
156.650
156.700
156.750
156.800
156.850
156.900
156.950
157.000
157.050
157.100
157.150
160.700
160.750
160.800
160.850
–
160.950
–
156.450
156.500
156.550
156.600
156.650
156.700
156.750
156.800
156.850
161.500
161.550
161.600
161.650
161.700
161.750
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal
Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:
Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued)
101
English
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued)
Frequency (MHz)
Channel
Number
Transmit
Receive
24
25
26
27
28
60
62
63
65
66
67**
68
69
71
72
73
74
75
76
77**
157.200
157.250
157.300
157.350
157.400
156.025
156.075
156.125
156.175
156.225
156.275
156.325
156.375
156.425
156.475
156.575
156.625
156.675
156.725
***
***
156.875
161.800
161.850
161.900
161.950
162.000
160.625
160.675
160.725
160.775
160.825
160.875
160.925
156.375
156.425
156.475
156.575
–
156.675
156.725
***
***
–
102
English
Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued)
Frequency (MHz)
Channel
Number
Transmit
Receive
78
79
80
84
85
86
87
88
156.925
156.975
157.025
157.075
157.125
157.175
157.225
157.275
157.325
157.375
157.425
161.525
161.575
161.625
161.675
161.725
161.775
161.825
161.875
161.925
161.975
162.025
* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be
lawfully used by the general public in US waters.
** Low power (1 W) only
*** Guard band
NOTE: A – in the Receive column indicates that the channel is
transmit only.
obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty
unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA.
Limited Warranty
I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW
LONG:
MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC. (“MOTOROLA”) warrants the
MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below
(“Product”) against defects in material and workmanship under
normal use and service for a period of time from the date of
purchase as scheduled below:
XPR Series Digital Mobile Radios
Two (2) Years
Product Accessories
One (1) Year
MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the
Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or
reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product
during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance
with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are
warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period.
All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of
MOTOROLA.
This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the
original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or
transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the
Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no
Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and
the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the
installation, maintenance or service of the Product.
MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary
equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or
used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product
with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly
excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use
the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range,
coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this
warranty.
Limited Warranty
MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS
II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:
This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S
responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or
refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA’s option, is the
exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME,
INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR
SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
103
English
INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT
SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.
III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY.
This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other
rights which may vary from state to state.
Limited Warranty
IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase
and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty
service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation
and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location.
Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its
authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the
company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or
communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining
warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744
US/Canada.
V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
A) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other
than its normal and customary manner.
B) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect.
104
English
C)Defects or damage from improper testing, operation,
maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment.
D)Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by
defects in material workmanship.
E) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications,
disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition
to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which
adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with
MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the
Product to verify any warranty claim.
F) Product which has had the serial number removed or made
illegible.
G)Rechargeable batteries if:
(1) any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken
or show evidence of tampering.
(2) the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the
battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it
is specified.
H)Freight costs to the repair depot.
I) A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the
software/firmware in the Product, does not function in
accordance with MOTOROLA’s published specifications or the
FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the
Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA.
J) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that
does not affect the operation of the Product.
K) Normal and customary wear and tear.
VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:
Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for
MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA
software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and
distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA
software may be used in only the Product in which the software was
originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be
replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to
produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without
limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or
reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of
rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is
granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA
patent rights or copyrights.
Limited Warranty
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought
against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a
claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and
MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded
against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are
attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are
conditioned on the following:
A) that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such
purchaser of any notice of such claim;
B) that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such
suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and
C)should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA’s opinion
be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a
United States patent, that such purchaser will permit
MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for
such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or
to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing
or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as
depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an
equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as
established by MOTOROLA.
MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent
infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or
parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not
furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability
for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by
MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the
Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with
respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts
thereof.
VII. GOVERNING LAW:
This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A.
105
English
Notes
Notes
106
English

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Create Date                     : 2011:09:08 11:16:42Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Modify Date                     : 2011:11:15 10:47:49+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:11:15 10:47:49+08:00
Copyright                       : MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ©Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Title                           : MOTOTRBO User Guide
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:a4516e1a-5688-4928-aada-f63e6de1508e
Instance ID                     : uuid:61e1a695-0f03-4cfd-a81d-fd24321075a1
Page Count                      : 118
Author                          : Motorola Solutions, Inc.

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	1600033
Application ID	LoqAWF08GJqJ1hc8GGYtsQ==
Document Description	Use rManual
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	292.41kB (3655146 bits)
Date Submitted	2011-12-10 00:00:00
Date Available	2012-03-01 00:00:00
Creation Date	2011-09-08 11:16:42
Producing Software	Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Document Lastmod	2011-11-15 10:47:49
Document Title	MOTOTRBO User Guide
Document Creator	FrameMaker 8.0
Document Author:	Motorola Solutions, Inc.

MOTOTRBO XPRTM 5550
Color Display Mobile
User Guide
68009504001-A
Declaration of Conformity
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a)
Responsible Party
Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A.
Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744
Declaration of Conformity
This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below.
Hereby declares that the product:
Model Name: XPR 5550
conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a)
Class B Digital Device
As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
English
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Declaration of Conformity
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
ii
English
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Contents
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Important Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance . . .ix
Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Computer Software Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
How to Use This User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What Your Dealer/System Administrator
Can Tell You . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Powering Up the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Adjusting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Identifying Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Programmable Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Assignable Radio Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . . . . . . . . . 6
Accessing the Programmed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Identifying Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Display Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Call Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Advanced Menu Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Mini Notice Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Sent Item Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Bluetooth Device Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Indicator Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Audio Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Contents
This User Guide contains all the information you need
to use the MOTOTRBO XPR Series Digital Mobile
Radios.
Using the Volume/Channel Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Switching Between Conventional Analog and Digital
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Capacity Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Receiving and Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecting a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecting a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selecting a Radio Channel, Subscriber Alias or ID, or
Group Alias or ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . . . . . . 17
Receiving and Responding to a Group Call . . . . . 17
Receiving and Responding to a Private Call . . . 18
Receiving an All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call . . 19
Making a Radio Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
English
iii
Contents
Making a Call with the Volume/Channel Knob . . 21
Making a Group Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Making a Private Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Making an All Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Making a Selective Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Making a Call with the Scroll Up and Scroll Down
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Making a Call with the Channel Up and Channel Down
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Making a Group or Private Call with the One Touch
Access Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Stopping a Radio Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Talkaround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Permanent Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
iv
Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Radio Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sending a Radio Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Initiating Remote Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Stopping Remote Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Scan Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Viewing an Entry in the Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Editing the Scan List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Adding a New Entry to the Scan List . . . . . . . . 30
Deleting an Entry from the Scan List . . . . . . . . 31
Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan
English
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Starting and Stopping Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Responding to a Transmission During a Scan . . 33
Deleting a Nuisance Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Restoring a Nuisance Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Vote Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Contacts Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Making a Group Call from Contacts . . . . . . . . . . 35
Making a Private Call from Contacts . . . . . . . . . 36
Assigning an Entry to a Programmable
Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Removing the Association between Entry and
Programmable Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting Default Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Call Indicator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call Alerts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private
Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Selective
Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text
Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Telemetry
Status with Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages . . . . . . . . 51
Resending a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Forwarding a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Managing Sent Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Viewing a Sent Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Sending a Sent Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Receiving a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Reading a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Managing Received Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . 55
Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox . . . . . 56
Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from the
Inbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Replying to a Text Message with Quick Text . . 56
Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox . . . . . 57
Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox . . . 58
Analog Message Encode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher . . 58
Analog Status Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Sending Status Update to Predefined Contact . . 59
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
IP Site Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Starting an Automatic Site Search . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Stopping an Automatic Site Search . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Starting a Manual Site Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Contents
Assigning Ring Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Escalating Alarm Tone Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Call Log Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Viewing Recent Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Deleting a Call from a Call List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Call Alert Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert . . . . . . 43
Making a Call Alert from the Contacts List . . . . . . 43
Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access Button
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Receiving an Emergency Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Responding to an Emergency Alarm . . . . . . . . . . 45
Sending an Emergency Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call . . . . . . . 47
Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Reinitiating an Emergency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Exiting Emergency Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Text Messaging Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sending a Quick Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch
Access Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Managing Text Messages in the Drafts Folder . . 51
Viewing a Saved Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts . . 51
English
Contents
vi
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lone Worker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Bluetooth On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device . .
Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device . . . . . . .
Switching Audio Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Device Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing the Notification List . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off . . . . .
Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level . . . .
Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off . . . . . . .
Setting the Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting the Display Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Horns/Lights On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Public Address System On or Off . .
Turning the External Public Address System On
or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Squelch Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off . . . . .
English
63
63
64
65
65
66
66
67
67
67
68
68
68
68
69
69
69
70
70
71
71
71
71
72
Turning the LED Indicators On or Off . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference . . . . . . 73
Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)
Feature On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off . 74
Identifying Cable Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Voice Announcement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Menu Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Analog Mic AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Digital Mic AGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Intelligent Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
GPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Accessing General Radio Information . . . . . . . . 77
Checking the Radio Alias and ID . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking the GPS Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Keypad Microphone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turning Keypad Tones On or Off . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Zone by Alias Search . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial . . . . . .
79
80
81
81
81
82
Radio Enable via Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Password Lock Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Accessing the Radio from Password . . . . . . . . . . 94
Unlocking the Radio from Locked State . . . . . . . 95
Turning the Password Lock On or Off . . . . . . . . . 95
Changing the Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Front Panel Configuration (FPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Entering FPC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Editing FPC Mode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Contents
Initiating Remote Monitor by Manual Dial . . . . . . 82
Making a Private Call by Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . 83
Making a Group, Private or All Call with the
Programmable Number Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search 85
Editing the Scan List by Alias Search . . . . . . . . . 85
Adding a New Entry to the Scan List . . . . . . . . 85
Deleting an Entry from the Scan List . . . . . . . . 86
Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan
List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Storing an Alias or ID from a Call List . . . . . . . . . 87
Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Writing and Sending a Text Message . . . . . . . . . 88
Replying to Text Messages from the Inbox . . . . . 89
Editing a Quick Reply Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Accessing the Drafts Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message . . 91
Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages . . . . . . . . 91
Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial . . 91
Editing a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Radio Disable via Manual Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Desktop Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mounting Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Miscellaneous Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Special Channel Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Emergency Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Non-Commercial Call Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Operating Frequency Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 101
vii
English
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Contents
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
viii
English
Software Version
Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance
All the features described in the following sections are
supported by the radio's software version R02.00.00.
Before using this product, read the operating
instructions for safe usage contained in the
Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet
enclosed with your radio.
ATTENTION!
This radio is restricted to occupational use only to
satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements.
Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness
information and operating instructions in the Regulatory
Compliance and Product Safety section of your Quick
Reference Guide enclosed with your radio (Motorola
Publication part number 68009508001) to ensure
compliance with RF energy exposure limits.
See Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
Version on page 78 to determine your radio's software
version.
Please check with your dealer or system administrator
for more details of all the features supported.
Important Safety Information
Important Safety Information
For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other
accessories, visit the following website:
http://www.motorolasolutions.com/governmentandenterprise
ix
English
Computer Software Copyrights
Computer Software Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this manual may
include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored
in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the
United States and other countries preserve for Motorola
certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer
programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right
to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted
computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted
Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola
products described in this manual may not be copied,
reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed
in any manner without the express written permission of
Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola
products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the
copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola,
except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that
arises by operation of law in the sale of a product.
English
The AMBE+2TM voice coding Technology embodied in
this product is protected by intellectual property rights
including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
This voice coding Technology is licensed solely for use
within this Communications Equipment. The user of this
Technology is explicitly prohibited from attempting to
decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the Object
Code, or in any other way convert the Object Code into a
human-readable form.
U.S. Pat. Nos. #5,870,405, #5,826,222, #5,754,974,
#5,701,390, #5,715,365, #5,649,050, #5,630,011,
#5,581,656, #5,517,511, #5,491,772, #5,247,579,
#5,226,084 and #5,195,166.
Getting Started
How to Use This User Guide
Selected features are also available on the single-site trunking
mode, Capacity Plus. See Capacity Plus on page 8 for more
information.
What Your Dealer/System Administrator
Can Tell You
You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the
following:
This User Guide covers the basic operation of the MOTOTRBO
Mobiles.
• Is your radio programmed with any preset conventional
However, your dealer or system administrator may have
customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your
dealer or system administrator for more information.
• Which buttons have been programmed to access other
Getting Started
Take a moment to review the following:
How to Use This User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
What Your Dealer/System Administrator
Can Tell You. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 1
Powering Up the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
Adjusting the Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 2
For features that are available in both Analog and Digital
modes, no icon is shown.
channels?
features?
• What optional accessories may suit your needs?
Throughout this publication, the icons below are used to
indicate features supported in either the conventional Analog
mode or conventional Digital mode:
Indicates a conventional Analog Mode-Only feature.
Indicates a conventional Digital Mode-Only feature.
English
Powering Up the Radio
Press the On/Off
Button briefly. You see
MOTOTRBO (TM) on the
radio’s display
momentarily, followed
by a welcome message
or welcome image.
Adjusting the Volume
The green LED lights
up and the Home
screen lights up.
A brief tone sounds,
indicating that the
power up test is
successful.
Getting Started
To increase the volume, turn the Volume/Channel Knob
clockwise.
On/Off Button
Volume/Channel Knob
OK
MENU
MEN
P1
P2
NOTE: There is no power up tone if the radio tones/alerts
function is disabled (see Turning the Radio Tones/
Alerts On or Off on page 68).
If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer.
To turn off the radio, press and hold the On/Off Button until you
see Powering Down on the radio’s display.
NOTE: Your radio may take up to 7 seconds to completely turn
off.
English
P3
P4
P1
P2
P3
P4
To decrease the volume, turn this knob counterclockwise.
NOTE: Your radio can be programmed to have a minimum
volume offset where the volume level cannot be turned
past the programmed minimum volume. Check with
your dealer or system administrator for more
information.
1
Identifying Radio Controls
Radio Controls
OK
MENU
P1
10
P2
P3
1 On/Off Button
6 Speaker
2 Volume/Channel Knob
7 Return/Home Button
3 Display
8 Front Programmable Buttons
4 OK/Menu Button
9 Accessory Connector
5 Scroll Up/Down
10 LED Indicators
P4
Identifying Radio Controls
Take a moment to review the following:
Radio Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 3
Programmable Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 4
Accessing the Programmed Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 6
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Using the Volume/Channel Knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 7
Switching Between Conventional Analog and
Digital Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
Capacity Plus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 8
English
Programmable Buttons
Your dealer can program the programmable buttons as
shortcuts to radio functions or up to a maximum of six (6)
preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button
press:
• Short press – Pressing and releasing rapidly.
• Long press – Pressing and holding for the programmed
Identifying Radio Controls
duration.
• Hold down – Keeping the button pressed.
NOTE: The programmed duration of a button press is
applicable for all assignable radio/utility functions or
settings. See Emergency Operation on page 44 for
more information on the programmed duration of the
Emergency button.
 Assignable Radio Functions
Bluetooth® Audio Switch – Toggles audio routing between
internal radio speaker and external Bluetooth-enabled
accessory.
Contacts – Provides direct access to the contacts list.
Call Alert – Provides direct access to the contacts list for you to
select a contact to whom a Call Alert can be sent.
Call Log – Selects the call log list.
Voice Announcement for Channel – Plays zone and channel
announcement voice messages for the current channel. This
function is unavailable when Voice Announcement is disabled.
Emergency – Depending on the programming, initiates or
cancels an Emergency alarm or call.
Ext PA On/Off – Toggles the audio routing between the
connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the
radio’s internal public address (PA) system.
Intelligent Audio On/Off – Toggles Intelligent Audio on or off.
Manual Dial
ID.
– Initiates a call by keying in any subscriber
Manual Site Roam*
– Starts the manual site search.
Mic AGC On/Off – Toggles the internal microphone automatic
gain control (AGC) on or off. Not applicable during a Bluetooth
session.
Monitor – Monitors a selected channel for activity.
Nuisance Channel Delete* – Temporarily removes an
unwanted channel, except for the Selected Channel, from the
scan list. The Selected Channel refers to the user’s selected
zone/channel combination from which scan is initiated.
Call Forwarding – Toggles Call Forwarding on or off.
English
* Not applicable in Capacity Plus
Site Lock On/Off*
off.
Option Board Feature – Toggles option board feature(s) on or
off for option board-enabled channels.
Status – Selects the status list menu.
PA On/Off – Toggles the radio’s internal public address (PA)
system on or off.
Permanent Monitor* – Monitors a selected channel for all radio
traffic until function is disabled.
Privacy
– Toggles privacy on or off.
Radio Alias and ID – Provides radio alias and ID.
Radio Check
– Determines if a radio is active in a system.
Radio Enable
enabled.
– Allows a target radio to be remotely
Radio Disable
disabled.
– Allows a target radio to be remotely
Telemetry Control
remote radio.
Text Message
– Toggles the automatic site roam on or
– Controls the Output Pin on a local or
– Selects the text message menu.
Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey
– Stops the
transmission of a remote monitored radio without giving any
indicators, or an ongoing interruptible call to free the channel.
Voice Announcement On/Off – Toggles Voice Announcement
on or off.
Voice Operating Transmission (VOX) – Toggles VOX on or
off.
Identifying Radio Controls
One Touch Access
– Directly initiates a predefined
Private or Group Call, a Call Alert or a Quick Text message.
Zone Toggle – Allows radio to switch between zones.
Remote Monitor
– Turns on the microphone of a target
radio without it giving any indicators.
Repeater/Talkaround* – Toggles between using a repeater and
communicating directly with another radio.
Scan* – Toggles scan on or off.
* Not applicable in Capacity Plus
English
 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions
All Tones/Alerts – Toggles all tones and alerts on or off.
Backlight – Adjusts the brightness level.
Channel Up/Down – Depending on the programming, changes
channel to previous or next channel.
Accessing the Programmed Functions
You can access various radio functions through one of the
following ways:
• A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons.
OR
Display Mode – Toggles the day/night display mode on or off.
Identifying Radio Controls
Power Level – Toggles transmit power level between high and
low.
Squelch
normal.
English
– Toggles squelch level between tight and
• Use the Menu Navigation Buttons as follows:
1 To access the menu, press the g button. Press the
appropriate Scroll Up/Down button (f or h) to access
the menu functions.
2 To select a function or enter a sub-menu, press the g
button.
3 To go back one menu level, or to return to the previous
screen, press the e button. Long press the e button to
return to the Home screen.
The Menu Navigation Buttons are also available on a keypad
microphone (see Using the Keypad on page 80).
NOTE: Your radio automatically exits the menu after a period
of inactivity and returns to your Home screen.
Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button
You can turn off the Channel Free Indication tone or the
• While a call is in progress,
the PTT button allows the
radio to transmit to other
radios in the call.
PTT Button
Press and hold down PTT
button to talk. Release the
PTT button to listen.
The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed.
• While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make
a new call (see Making a Radio Call on page 20).
If the Talk Permit Tone (see Turning the Talk Permit Tone On
or Off on page 69) or the PTT Sidetone
is enabled, wait
until the short alert tone ends before talking.
During a call, if the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled on your radio (programmed by your dealer), you
hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio (the
radio that is receiving your call) releases the PTT button,
indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
PTT Sidetone
by disabling all radio tones and alerts
(see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on
page 68).
Using the Volume/Channel Knob
The Volume/Channel Knob can be programmed as dual
purpose for both volume and channel or as a volume-only
control.
To adjust volume, see Adjusting the Volume on page 2.
To change channels, push and hold the knob until channel
selection screen is displayed, then turn the knob to the required
channel.
Identifying Radio Controls
The PTT button on the side of
the microphone serves two
basic purposes:
You also hear the Channel Free Indication tone if your call
is interrupted, for example when the radio receives an
Emergency Call.
To exit channel selection state, do any of the following.
• Push the Volume/Channel Knob again
• Press g
• Press e
• Wait for the menu timer to expire
English
Switching Between Conventional Analog
and Digital Mode
Each channel in your
radio can be
configured as a
conventional analog or
conventional digital
channel.
Scroll Up/Down
Volume/Channel Knob
OK
P1
P2
P3
P4
Identifying Radio Controls
• Scroll Up/Down buttons, or
• Volume/Channel Knob, or
• programmed Channel Up or Channel Down buttons
When switching from digital to analog mode, certain features
are unavailable. Icons for the digital features (such as
Messages) reflect this change by appearing ‘grayed out’.
Disabled features are hidden in the menu.
Your radio also has features available in both analog and digital
mode. However, the minor differences in the way each feature
works does NOT affect the performance of your radio.
NOTE: Your radio also switches between digital and analog
modes during a dual mode scan (see Scan on
page 32).
English
Capacity Plus is a single-site trunking configuration of the
MOTOTRBO radio system, which uses a pool of channels to
support hundreds of users and up to 254 Groups. This feature
allows your radio to efficiently utilize the available number of
programmed channels while in Repeater Mode.
MENU
To switch between an analog or a digital channel, use the
Capacity Plus
Icons of features not applicable to Capacity Plus are not
available in the menu. You hear a negative indicator tone if you
try to access a feature not applicable to Capacity Plus via a
programmable button press.
Your radio also has features that are available in both
conventional digital mode and Capacity Plus. However, the
minor differences in the way each feature works does NOT
affect the performance of your radio.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for more
information on this system.
Identifying Status Indicators
The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio
status, text entries, and menu entries.
The following are icons that appear on the status bar at the top
of the radio’s display. Icons are displayed on the status bar,
arranged left-to-right, in order of appearance/usage and are
channel specific.
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
The number of bars displayed represents the radio
signal strength. Four bars indicate the strongest
signal. This icon is only displayed while receiving.
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth feature is enabled but there is no
remote Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth Connected
The Bluetooth feature is enabled. The icon stays lit
when one or more remote Bluetooth devices are
connected.
Identifying Status Indicators
Your radio indicates its operational status through the following:
Display Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 9
Call Icons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 11
Sent Item Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 12
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 13
Audio Tones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
Indicator Tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 14
Display Icons
Emergency
Radio is in Emergency mode.
Notification
Notification list is not empty.
Scan*
Scan feature is enabled.
English
Scan – Priority 1*
Radio detects activity on channel/group designated
as Priority 1).
GPS Not Available/Out of Range
The GPS feature is enabled but is not receiving data
from the satellite.
Scan – Priority 2*
Radio detects activity on channel/group designated
as Priority 2.
Option Board
The Option Board is enabled.
Option Board Non-Function
The Option Board is disabled.
Identifying Status Indicators
Vote Scan
Vote scan feature is enabled.
10
English
Tones Disable
Tones are turned off.
Monitor
Selected channel is being monitored.
Talkaround*
In the absence of a repeater, radio is currently
configured for direct radio to radio communication.
Site Roaming*
The site roaming feature is enabled.
Secure
The Privacy feature is enabled.
Unsecure
The Privacy feature is disabled.
GPS Available
The GPS feature is enabled. The icon stays lit when
a position fix is available.
Power Level
Radio is set at Low power.
OR
Radio is set at High power.
* Not applicable in Capacity Plus
Call Icons
Private Call
Indicates a Private Call in progress.
In the Contacts list, it indicates a subscriber alias
(name) or ID (number).
Group Call/All Call
Indicates a Group Call or All Call in progress.
In the Contacts list, it indicates a group alias (name)
or ID (number).
The following icons appear beside menu items on the radio’s
display that offer a choice between two options or as an
indication that there is a sub-menu offering two options.
Checkbox (Empty)
Indicates the option is not selected.
Checkbox (Checked)
Indicates the option is selected.
Solid Black Box
Indicates the option selected for the menu item with a
sub-menu.
Identifying Status Indicators
The following icons appear on the radio’s display during a call.
These icons also appear in the Contacts list to indicate alias or
ID type.
Advanced Menu Icons
11
English
Mini Notice Icons
The following icons appear momentarily on the radio’s display
after an action to perform task is taken.
Identifying Status Indicators
Successful Transmission (Positive)
Successful action taken.
12
English
Sent Item Icons
The following icons appear in the Sent Items folder.
OR
Sent Successfully
The text message is sent successfully.
OR
Send Failed
The text message cannot be sent.
Failed Transmission (Negative)
Failed action taken.
Transmission in Progress (Transitional)
Transmitting. This dynamic icon is seen before
indication for Successful Transmission or Failed
Transmission.
In-Progress
OR
• The text message to a subscriber alias or ID is
pending transmission, followed by waiting for
acknowledgement.
• The text message to a group alias or ID is pending
transmission.
Bluetooth Device Icons
LED indicators show the operational status of your radio.
Bluetooth Data Device
Bluetooth-enabled data device, such as a scanner.
Bluetooth Audio Device
Bluetooth-enabled audio device, such as a headset.
Red
Yellow
Bluetooth PTT Device
Bluetooth-enabled PTT device, such as a PTT-Only
Device (POD).
Green
P1
P2
Blinking red – Radio is receiving an emergency transmission
or has failed the self-test upon powering up.
Solid green – Radio is powering up, or transmitting.
Identifying Status Indicators
The following icons also appear next to items in the list of
Bluetooth-enabled devices available to indicate the device type.
LED Indicators
Blinking green – Radio is receiving a non-privacy-enabled call
or data, or detecting activity over the air.
Double blinking green – Radio is receiving a privacy-enabled
call or data.
Solid yellow – Radio is monitoring a conventional channel.
Blinking yellow – Radio is scanning for activity or receiving a
Call Alert.
13
English
Double blinking yellow – Radio is no longer connected to the
repeater while in Capacity Plus, all Capacity Plus channels are
currently busy, Auto Roaming is enabled, radio is actively
searching for a new site. Also indicates radio has yet to respond
to a group call alert, or radio is locked.
Identifying Status Indicators
NOTE: While in conventional mode, when the green LED
blinks, it indicates the radio detects activity over the air.
Due to the nature of the digital protocol, this activity
may or may not affect the radio's programmed channel.
14
English
For Capacity Plus, there is no LED indication when the
radio is detecting activity over the air.
Indicator Tones
High pitched tone
Low pitched tone
Positive Indicator Tone
Negative Indicator Tone
Audio Tones
Receiving and Making Calls
Continuous Tone
Periodic Tone
A monotone sound. Sounds
continuously until termination.
Sounds periodically depending on the
duration set by the radio. Tone starts,
stops, and repeats itself.
Repetitive Tone
A single tone that repeats itself until it is
terminated by the user.
Momentary Tone
Sounds only once for a short period of
time defined by the radio.
Once you understand how your MOTOTRBO Mobile is
configured, you are ready to use your radio.
Use this navigation guide to familiarize yourself with the basic
Call features:
Selecting a Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 15
Selecting a Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Selecting a Radio Channel, Subscriber Alias or ID,
or Group Alias or ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 16
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . . . . . . . . . page 17
Making a Radio Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 20
Stopping a Radio Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 25
Talkaround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26
Permanent Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 26
Selecting a Site
Receiving and Making Calls
Alert tones provide you with audible indications of the radio’s
status or the radio’s response to data received.
A site is a specific area where a base station is placed to
provide optimal coverage for the radio.
If enabled, your radio is able to connect to different available
sites via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
See IP Site Connect on page 60 for more information.
15
English
Selecting a Zone
A zone is a group of channels. Your radio supports up to 99
channels and 2 zones, with a maximum of 99 channels per
zone.
Receiving and Making Calls
Use the following procedure to select a zone.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Zone button and proceed to Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Zone and press g to select.
3 The current zone is displayed and indicated by a 9.
4 f or h to the required zone and press g to select.
5 The display shows  Selected momentarily and
returns to the selected zone screen.
16
English
Selecting a Radio Channel, Subscriber
Alias or ID, or Group Alias or ID
Procedure:
Once the required zone is displayed (if you have multiple
zones in your radio), use the Scroll Up/Down buttons,
Volume/Channel Knob, or programmed Channel Up/Down
buttons to select the channel, subscriber alias or ID, or group
alias or ID.
OR
Press the programmed One Touch Access button to select
the preset channel assigned to the button.
Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call
Procedure:
When you receive a Group Call (while on the Home screen):
1 The green LED blinks.
Green
LED
NOTE: The green LED lights up while the radio is transmitting
and double blinks when the radio is receiving a privacyenabled call.
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call, your radio must
have the same Privacy Key, or the same Key Value and
Key ID (programmed by your dealer) as the
transmitting radio (the radio you are receiving the call
from).
OK
MENU
2 The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first
text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays
the group call alias.
P1
PIf2the Channel
P 3 Free
P 4Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
OR
If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT
button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and
free the channel for you to talk/respond.
Receiving and Making Calls
To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be
configured as part of that group.
Once the channel, subscriber
alias or ID, or group alias or ID
is displayed, you can proceed
to receive and respond to
calls.
The green LED lights up
while the radio is transmitting
and blinks when the radio is
receiving.
 Receiving and Responding to a Group Call
4 The green LED lights up.
See Privacy on page 59 for more information.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
17
English
6 Release the PTT button to listen.
7 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
See Making a Group Call on page 21 for details on making a
Group Call.
Receiving and Making Calls
 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call
A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another
individual radio.
There are two types of Private Calls. The first type, where a
radio presence check is performed prior to setting up the call,
while the other sets up the call immediately.
When your radio is checked, the green LED blinks.
Only one of these call types can be programmed to your radio
by your dealer.
Procedure:
When you receive a Private Call:
1 The green LED blinks.
2 The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the caller alias.
18
English
3 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
OR
If the Voice Interrupt feature is enabled, press the PTT
button to stop the current call from the transmitting radio and
free the channel for you to talk/respond.
4 The green LED lights up.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
6 Release the PTT button to listen.
7 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
8 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
See Making a Private Call on page 22 for details on making a
Private Call.
 Receiving and Responding to a Selective Call
An All Call is a call from an individual radio to every radio on the
channel. It is used to make important announcements requiring
the user’s full attention.
A Selective Call is a call from an individual radio to another
individual radio. It is a Private Call on an analoganalogue
system.
Procedure:
When you receive an All Call:
Procedure:
When you receive a Selective Call:
1 A tone sounds and the green LED blinks.
1 The green LED blinks.
2 The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The first
2 The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
text line shows the caller alias. The second text line displays
All Call.
3 Once the All Call ends, the radio returns to the previous
screen before receiving the call.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is now
available for use.
You cannot respond to an All Call.
See Making an All Call on page 22 for details on making an All
Call.
NOTE: The radio stops receiving the All Call if you switch to a
different channel while receiving the call.
During an All Call, you are not able to continue with
any menu navigation or editing until the call ends.
first text line shows the caller alias or Selective Call or
Alert with Call.
3 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond.
Press the PTT button to respond to the call.
4 The LED lights up solid green.
Receiving and Making Calls
 Receiving an All Call
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
6 Release the PTT button to listen.
7 If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
8 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
19
English
NOTE: See Making a Selective Call on page 23 for details on
making a Selective Call.
Making a Radio Call
You can select a channel, subscriber alias or ID, or group alias
or ID by using:
• Volume/Channel Knob
• Scroll Up/Down buttons
Receiving and Making Calls
• The programmed Channel Up or Channel Down buttons
20
English
• A programmed One Touch Access button
• The programmed number keys – This method is for Group,
Private and All Calls only and is used with the keypad
microphone (see Making a Group, Private or All Call with
the Programmable Number Key on page 83).
• The Contacts list (see Contacts Settings on page 34)
• Manual Dial (via Contacts) – This method is for Private Calls
only and is dialed using a keypad microphone (see Making a
Private Call by Manual Dial on page 83)
NOTE: Your radio must have the Privacy feature enabled on
the channel to send a privacy-enabled transmission.
Only target radios with the same Privacy Key as your
radio are able to unscramble the transmission.
See Privacy on page 59 for more information.
 Making a Call with the Volume/Channel Knob
5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
 Making a Group Call
To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be
configured as part of that group.
Procedure:
1 Press the Volume/Channel Knob to enter the channel
selection state.
2 Turn the knob to select the channel with the active group
alias or ID.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the group call alias.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond. Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
7 Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the
call.
You can also make a Group Call via Contacts (see Making a
Group Call from Contacts on page 35).
Receiving and Making Calls
responds, the green LED blinks. You see the Group Call
icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio alias
or ID on your display.
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
21
English
Receiving and Making Calls
 Making a Private Call
5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
While you can receive and/or respond to a Private Call
initiated by an authorized individual radio, your radio must
be programmed for you to initiate a Private Call.
6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
You hear a negative indicator tone, when you make a Private
Call via the Menu, Call Log, Contacts list, One Touch Access
button, the programmed number keys, Scroll Up/Down
buttons, or the Volume/Channel Knob if this feature is not
enabled.
Use the Text Message or Call Alert features to contact an
individual radio. See Text Messaging Features on page 50 or
Call Alert Operation on page 43 for more information.
Procedure:
1 Press the Volume/Channel Knob to enter the channel
selection state.
2 Turn the knob to select the channel with the active
subscriber alias or ID.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
22
English
responds, the green LED blinks.
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
7 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
You can also make a Private Call via Contacts (see Making a
Private Call from Contacts on page 36), manually dial a
Private Call (see Making a Private Call by Manual Dial on
page 83) or perform a quick alphanumeric search for the
required target alias via a keypad entry (see Making a Group,
Private, Phone or All Call by Alias Search on page 84).
 Making an All Call
This feature allows you to transmit to all users on the channel.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
Procedure:
1 Press the Volume/Channel Knob to enter the channel
selection state.
2 Turn the knob to select the channel with the active All Call
group alias or ID.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
Users on the channel cannot respond to an All Call.
 Making a Selective Call
Just like a Private Call, while you can receive and/or respond to
a Selective Call initiated by an authorized individual radio, your
radio must be programmed for you to initiate a Selective Call.
Procedure:
1 Press the Volume/Channel Knob to enter the channel
selection state.
2 Turn the knob to select the channel with the active
subscriber alias or ID.
3 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Private Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows the subscriber alias. The second text
line displays the call status.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
Receiving and Making Calls
up. The Group Call icon appears in the top right corner. The
first text line shows All Call.
5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
responds, the green LED blinks.
6 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
23
English
7 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
 Making a Call with the Scroll Up and Scroll Down
Buttons
Receiving and Making Calls
You can use the programmed Channel Up and Channel Down
buttons to replace the usage of the Volume/Channel Knob to
select the channel with the active group ID or active subscriber
ID.
Refer to the instructions in Making a Call with the Volume/
Channel Knob from page 21 and replace Steps 1 and 2 of each
with the following:
1 f or h while in the Home screen to select the channel
with the active group ID or active subscriber ID.
 Making a Call with the Channel Up and Channel
Down Buttons
 Making a Group or Private Call with the One Touch
Access Button
The One Touch Access feature allows you to make a Group,
Private or Phone Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This
feature can be assigned to a short or long programmable button
press.
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a One Touch
Access button. Your radio can have multiple One Touch
Access buttons programmed.
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make
a Group or Private Call to the predefined alias or ID.
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Group/Private Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second
text line displays the call status for a Private Call.
You can use the programmed Channel Up and Channel Down
buttons to replace the usage of the Volume/Channel Knob to
select the channel with the active group ID or active subscriber
ID.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
Refer to the instructions in Making a Call with the Volume/
Channel Knob from page 21 and replace Steps 1 and 2 of each
with the following:
For Group Call only: Wait for the PTT Sidetone to
finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
1 Press the Channel Up or Channel Down button to select
the channel with the active group ID or active subscriber ID.
24
English
clearly into the microphone.
OR
4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
responds, the green LED blinks.
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
6 Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the
call.
For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends.
This feature allows you to stop an ongoing Group or Private Call
to free the channel for transmission. For example, when a radio
experiences a “stuck microphone” condition where the PTT
button is inadvertently pressed by the user.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this
feature.
Procedure:
While on the required channel:
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey
button.
2 The display shows Remote Dekey.
3 Wait for acknowledgment.
4 The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display
shows Remote Dekey Success, indicating that the channel
is now free.
OR
The radio sounds a negative indicator tone and the display
shows Remote Dekey Failed.
Receiving and Making Calls
5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
Stopping a Radio Call
On the interrupted radio, the display shows
Call Interrupted, and the radio sounds a negative indicator
tone until you release the PTT button, if it is transmitting an
interruptible call that is stopped via this feature.
25
English
Talkaround
You can continue to communicate when your repeater is not
operating, or when your radio is out of the repeater’s range but
within talking range of other radios. This is called “talkaround”.
Receiving and Making Calls
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
Permanent Monitor
Use the Permanent Monitor feature to continuously monitor a
selected channel for activity.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
Procedure:
Procedure:
Press the programmed Repeater/Talkaround button to toggle
between talkaround and repeater modes.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button.
1 g to access the menu.
3 Press the programmed Permanent Monitor button to exit
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Talkaround and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable Talkaround. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Talkaround. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
6 The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
The Talkaround setting is retained even after powering down.
26
English
2 Radio sounds an alert tone, the yellow LED lights up, and
the display shows Permanent Monitor On. The monitor
icon appears on the status bar.
Permanent Monitor mode.
4 Radio sounds an alert tone, the yellow LED turns off, and
display shows Permanent Monitor Off.
Radio Check
Advanced Features
Radio Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan Lists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vote Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contacts Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Indicator Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Log Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Alert Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Messaging Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Message Encode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Status Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IP Site Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lone Worker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notification List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 27
page 28
page 30
page 32
page 34
page 34
page 38
page 41
page 43
page 44
page 50
page 58
page 59
page 59
page 60
page 63
page 65
page 65
page 68
page 68
If enabled, this feature allows you to determine if another radio
is active in a system without disturbing the user of that radio. No
audible or visual notification is shown on the target radio.
This feature is only applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs.
 Sending a Radio Check
Procedure:
Use the programmed Radio Check button.
1 Press the programmed Radio Check button.
2 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
Advanced Features
Use this navigation guide to learn more about advanced
features available with your radio:
g to select.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The LED lights up solid green.
4 Wait for acknowledgement.
5 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
6 Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
OR
27
English
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
g to select.
Use the Remote Monitor feature to turn on the microphone of a
target radio (subscriber IDs only). No audible or visual indication
is given to the target radio. You can use this feature to monitor,
remotely, any audible activity surrounding the target radio.
Your radio must be programmed to allow you to use this feature.
4 f or h to Radio Check and press g to select.
 Initiating Remote Monitor
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
Procedure:
Use the programmed Remote Monitor button.
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
Advanced Features
Remote Monitor
6 Wait for acknowledgement.
1 Press the programmed Remote Monitor button.
7 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
2 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
8 Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
If the e button is pressed when the radio is waiting for
acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and the radio terminates all
retries and exits Radio Check mode.
You can also initiate Radio Check via manual dial (see
Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial on page 82).
28
English
g to select.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
4 Wait for acknowledgment.
5 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing
audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration
and display shows Rem. Monitor.
Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and
the LED turns off.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
 Stopping Remote Monitor
Procedure:
Use the menu.
Remote Monitor automatically stops after a programmed
duration or when there is any user operation on the target radio.
1 g to access the menu.
Procedure:
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
1 Press the programmed Transmit Interrupt Remote Dekey
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
g to select.
4 f or h to Remote Mon. and press g to select.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
7 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing
audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration
and display shows Rem. Monitor.
Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and
the LED turns off.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone
the display shows negative mini notice.
button.
2 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
3 Wait for acknowledgment.
Advanced Features
OR
You can also manually select a target radio address (see
Initiating Remote Monitor by Manual Dial on page 82).
4 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
29
English
Scan Lists
Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/
groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the
channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current
channel/group.
There is no priority icon if priority is set to None.
Your radio can support up to 250 scan lists, with a maximum of
16 members in a list. Each scan list supports a mixture of both
analog and digital entries.
 Adding a New Entry to the Scan List
You can add, delete, or prioritize channels by editing a scan list.
You can attach a new scan list to your radio via Front Panel
Programming.
Advanced Features
channel list. You cannot have multiple Priority 1 or Priority 2
channels in a scan list.
 Editing the Scan List
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
4 f or h to Add Member and press g to select.
 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List
5 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 Use f or h to view each member on the list.
The priority icon appears left of the member’s alias, if set, to
indicate whether the member is on a Priority 1 or Priority 2
30
English
select.
6 f or h to the required priority level and press g to
select.
7 The display shows positive mini notice, followed
immediately by Add Another?.
8 f or h to Yes and press g to select, to add another
entry, and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
OR
f or h to No and press g to select to save the current
list.
 Deleting an Entry from the Scan List
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
5 f or h to Delete and press g to select.
6 At Delete Entry?, f or h to Yes and press g to
select, to delete the entry. The display shows positive mini
notice.
OR
f or h to No and press g to select to return to the
previous screen.
List
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
5 f or h to Edit Priority and press g to select.
6 f or h to the required priority level and press g to
Advanced Features
Procedure:
 Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan
select.
7 The display shows positive mini notice before returning to
the previous screen.
7 Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to delete other entries.
8 The priority icon appears left of the member’s name.
After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press e to
return to the Home screen.
There is no priority icon if priority is set to None.
31
English
Scan
When you start a scan, your radio cycles through the
programmed scan list for the current channel looking for voice
activity.
The yellow LED blinks and the scan icon appears on the status
bar.
Advanced Features
During a dual mode scan, if you are on a digital channel, and
your radio locks onto an analog channel, it automatically
switches from digital mode to analog mode for the duration of
the call. This is also true for the reverse.
 Starting and Stopping Scan
Procedure:
Press the programmed Scan button to start or stop Scan. OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 Use the Scroll Up/Down buttons to select a channel
programmed with a scan list.
2 g to access the menu.
3 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
4 f or h to Scan State and press g to select.
There are two ways of initiating scan:
5 f or h to required scan state and press g to select.
• Main Channel Scan (Manual): Your radio scans all the
6 The display shows Scan On when scan is enabled. The
channels/groups in your scan list. On entering scan, your
radio may – depending on the settings – automatically start
on the last scanned “active” channel/group or on the channel
where scan was initiated.
• Auto Scan (Automatic): Your radio automatically starts
scanning when you select a channel/group that has Auto
Scan enabled.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
32
English
yellow LED blinks and the scan icon appears.
OR
The display shows Scan Off if scan is disabled. The LED
turns off and the scan icon disappears.
While scanning, the radio can only accept data (e.g. text
message, location, telemetry, or PC data) if received on its
Selected Channel.
 Deleting a Nuisance Channel
During scanning, your radio stops on a channel/group where
activity is detected. The radio stays on that channel for a
programmed time period known as “hang time”.
If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise
(termed a “nuisance” channel), you can temporarily remove the
unwanted channel from the scan list.
Procedure:
This capability does not apply to the channel designated as the
Selected Channel.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
you to respond.
2 Press the PTT button during hang time. The green LED
lights up.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
Procedure:
1 When your radio “locks on to” an unwanted or nuisance
channel, press the programmed Nuisance Channel Delete
button until you hear a tone.
2 Release the Nuisance Channel Delete button. The
nuisance channel is deleted.
Deleting a “nuisance” channel is only possible through the
programmed Nuisance Channel Delete button. This feature is
not accessible through the menu.
4 Release the PTT button to listen.
 Restoring a Nuisance Channel
5 If you do not respond within the hang time, the radio returns
Procedure:
To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the
following:
to scanning other channels/groups.
Advanced Features
 Responding to a Transmission During a Scan
• Turn the radio off and then power it on again, OR
• Stop and restart a scan via the programmed Scan button or
menu, OR
• Change the channel via the Scroll Up/Down buttons.
33
English
Vote Scan
Vote Scan provides you with wide area coverage in areas where
there are multiple base stations transmitting identical
information on different analog channels.
Contacts provides “address-book” capabilities on your radio.
Each entry corresponds to an alias or ID that you use to initiate
a call.
Your radio scans analog channels of multiple base stations and
performs a voting process to select the strongest received
signal. Once that is established, your radio unmutes to
transmissions from that base station.
Each entry, depending on context, associates with one of five
types of calls: Group Call, Private Call, All Call, PC Call or
Dispatch Call.
The yellow LED blinks and the vote scan icon appears on the
status bar.
Advanced Features
Contacts Settings
To respond to a transmission during a Vote Scan, follow the
same procedures as Responding to a Transmission During a
Scan on page 33.
34
English
PC Call and Dispatch Call are data-related. They are only
available with the applications. Refer to the data applications
documentation for further details.
NOTE: If the Privacy feature is enabled on a channel, you can
make privacy-enabled Group Call, Private Call, and All
Call on that channel. Only target radios with the same
Privacy Key OR the same Key Value and
Key ID as your radio are able to unscramble the
transmission.
See Privacy on page 59 for more information.
Additionally, Contacts menu allows you to assign each entry to a
programmable number key or more on a keypad microphone. If
an entry is assigned to a number key, your radio can perform a
quick dial on the entry.
Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
• Call Type
• Call Alias
• Call ID
NOTE: You can add, or edit subscriber IDs for the Digital
Contacts list. Deleting subscriber IDs can only be
performed by your dealer.
For the Analog Contacts list, you can only view the
subscriber IDs, edit the subscriber IDs, and initiate a
Call Alert. Adding and deleting capabilities can only be
performed by your dealer.
 Making a Group Call from Contacts
Procedure:
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
6 Release the PTT button to listen. When any user in the
group responds, the green LED blinks. You see the Group
Call icon, the group alias or ID, and that user’s alias or ID
on your display.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the target radio releases
the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to
respond. Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time,
the call ends.
Advanced Features
Your radio supports two Contacts lists, one for Analog contacts
and one for Digital contacts, with a a maximum of 500 members
for each Contacts list.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required group alias or ID.
35
English
 Making a Private Call from Contacts
the previous screen.
Procedure:
Your radio may be programmed to perform a radio
presence check prior to setting up the Private Call. If
the target radio is not available, you hear a short tone
and see negative mini notice on the display.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID.
4 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The display shows the destination alias.
5 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
Advanced Features
6 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
36
responds, the green LED blinks and the display shows the
transmitting user's alias or ID.
7 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time,
the call ends.
8 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
NOTE: If you release the PTT button while the radio is setting
up the call, it exits without any indication and returns to
English
The radio returns to the menu prior to initiating the
radio presence check.
 Assigning an Entry to a Programmable
Number Key
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
4 f or h to Program Key and press g to select.
5 f or h to the desired number key and press g to
select.
OR
If the number key is currently assigned to another entry, the
display shows The Key is Already Used and then, the
first line of the display shows Overwrite?.
f or h to Yes and press g to select.
shows positive mini notice.
7 The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
NOTE: Each entry can be associated to different number keys.
You see a checkmark before each number key that is
assigned to an entry. If the checkmark is before Empty,
you have not assign a number key to the entry.
If a number key is assigned to an entry in a particular
mode, this feature is not supported when you long
press the number key in another mode.
See Making a Group, Private or All Call with the
Programmable Number Key on page 83 for details on making
a Group, Private or All Call with the programmed number
key(s).
Programmable Number Key
Procedure:
Long press the programmed number key to the required alias or
ID, press g to select, and proceed to Step 4.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Advanced Features
6 The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display
 Removing the Association between Entry and
select.
4 f or h to Program Key and press g to select.
5 f or h to Empty and press g to select.
6 The first line of the display shows Clear from all keys?.
7 f or h to Yes and press g to select.
8 The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display
shows positive mini notice.
9 The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
NOTE: When an entry is deleted, the association between the
entry and its programmed number key(s) is removed.
37
English
 Setting Default Contact
Procedure:
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Call
Alerts
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received Call
Alert.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Procedure:
select.
4 f or h to Set as Default and press g to select.
5 The radio sounds a positive indicator tone and the display
shows positive mini notice.
Advanced Features
Call Indicator Settings
6 A 9 appears beside the selected default alias or ID.
38
English
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
6 f or h to Call Alert and press g to select. The
current tone is indicated by a 9.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Private
Calls
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Private
Call.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
6 f or h to Selective Call and press g to select. The
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
6 f or h to Private Call.
7 Press g to enable Private Call ringing tones. The display
shows 9 beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Private Call ringing tones. The 9
disappears from beside Enabled.
current tone is indicated by a 9.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for Text
Message
You can turn on or off the ringing tones for a received Text
Message.
Advanced Features
Procedure:
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for
Selective Call
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
You can select, or turn on or off ringing tones for a received
Selective Call.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
Procedure:
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
6 f or h to Messages and press g to select. The
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
current tone is indicated by a 9.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
39
English
 Activating or Deactivating Call Ringers for
Telemetry Status with Text
You can turn on or off the alert tones for a received Telemetry
Status with Text.
You can program your radio to sound one of ten predefined
ringing tones when receiving a Call Alert or a Text Message
from a particular contact.
Procedure:
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.The entries
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
Advanced Features
 Assigning Ring Styles
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
5 f or h to Call Ringers and press g to select.
4 f or h to Edit and press g to select.
6 f or h to Telemetry and press g to select. The
5 Press g until display shows Edit Ringtone menu.
current tone is indicated by a 9.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
40
English
6 A 9 indicates the current selected tone.
7 f or h to the required tone and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected tone.
8 The display shows a positive mini notice.
The radio sounds out each ring style as you navigate through
the list.
 Escalating Alarm Tone Volume
Call Log Features
Your radio keeps track of all recent outgoing, answered, and
missed Private Calls. Use the call log feature to view and
manage recent calls.
Procedure:
You can perform the following tasks in each of your call lists:
1 g to access the menu.
• Store alias or ID to Contacts
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
• Delete
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
• View Details
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
 Viewing Recent Calls
5 f or h to Escalert.
The lists are Missed, Answered, and Outgoing.
6 Press g to enable Escalert. The display shows 9 beside
Procedure:
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Escalert. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
Advanced Features
You can program your radio to continually alert you when a
radio call remains unanswered. This is done by automatically
increasing the alarm tone volume over time. This feature is
known as Escalert.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Call Log and press g to select.
3 f or h to preferred list and press g to select.
4 The display shows the most recent entry at the top of the
list.
5 f or h to view the list.
Press the PTT button to start a Private Call with the current
selected alias or ID.
41
English
 Deleting a Call from a Call List
 Viewing Details from a Call List
Procedure:
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Call Log and press g to select.
2 f or h to Call Log and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required list and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required list and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
5 f or h to Delete and press g to select.
Advanced Features
6 Press g to select Yes to delete the entry. The display
shows positive mini notice.
OR
f or h to No to return to the previous screen.
When you select a call list and it contains no entries, the display
shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if Keypad Tones are
turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On or Off on page 81).
42
English
select.
5 f or h to View Details and press g to select.
Display shows details.
Call Alert Operation
This feature is applicable for subscriber aliases or IDs only and
is accessible through the menu via Contacts or manual dial.
 Receiving and Responding to a Call Alert
When you receive a Call Alert page, you see the notification list
listing a Call Alert with the alias or ID of the calling radio on the
display.
Procedure:
1 You hear a repetitive tone. The yellow LED blinks.
2 Press the PTT button while the display still shows the Call
Alert in the Notification List to respond with a Private Call.
OR
Press g to exit the Notification List. The alert is moved to
the Missed Call Log.
See Notification List on page 68 for details about the
Notification List.
See Call Log Features on page 41 for details about the Missed
Call List.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
g to select.
4 f or h to Call Alert and press g to select.
5 The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or
ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent.
6 The green LED lights up when your radio is sending the Call
Advanced Features
Call Alert paging enables you to alert a specific radio user to call
you back when they are able to do so.
 Making a Call Alert from the Contacts List
Alert.
7 If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display
shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the
display shows negative mini notice.
You can also send a Call Alert by manually dialing the
subscriber ID (see Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial on
page 88).
43
English
 Making a Call Alert with the One Touch Access
Button
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to make
a Call Alert to the predefined alias or ID.
2 The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or
ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent.
3 The green LED lights up when your radio is sending the Call
Alert.
Advanced Features
4 If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display
shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the
display shows negative mini notice.
44
English
Emergency Operation
An Emergency Alarm is used to indicate a critical situation. You
are able to initiate an Emergency at any time on any screen
display even when there is activity on the current channel.
Your dealer can set the duration of a button press for the
programmed Emergency button, except for long press, which is
similar with all other buttons:
• Short press – Between 0.05 seconds and 0.75 seconds
• Long press – Between 1.00 second and 3.75 seconds
The Emergency button is assigned with the Emergency On/ Off
feature. Check with your dealer for the assigned operation of
the Emergency button.
If short press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the
Emergency mode, then long press the Emergency button is
assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
If long press the Emergency button is assigned to turn on the
Emergency mode, then short press the Emergency button is
assigned to exit the Emergency mode.
Your radio supports three Emergency Alarms:
• Emergency Alarm
• Emergency Alarm with Call
• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
In addition, each alarm has the following types:
2 Press e and select Yes to exit the Alarm List.
and/or visual indicators.
• Silent – Radio transmits an alarm signal without any audio or
visual indicators. Radio receives calls without any sound
through the radio’s speaker, until you press the PTT button to
initiate the call.
• Silent with Voice – Radio transmits an alarm signal without
any audio or visual indicators, but allow incoming calls to
sound through the radio’s speaker.
Only one of the Emergency Alarms above can be assigned to
the programmed Emergency button or the Emergency
footswitch.
 Receiving an Emergency Alarm
Procedure:
1 The emergency icon appears, a tone sounds, the red LED
blinks, and the radio displays the Alarm List if there is more
than one alarm listed. The emergency caller aliases are
listed. f or h to the required alias and press g to view
more details. Press g again to view your action options.
OR
The emergency icon appears, a tone sounds, the red LED
blinks, and the radio displays the emergency caller alias
Press g to view more details. Press g again to view
your action options.
When your radio receives an Emergency Alarm, it displays the
Emergency Alarm received indications until acknowledgement
is sent (if enabled) and you exit the Emergency mode.
You are unable to receive any other indications or displays for
any other calls until you exit the Emergency Alarm received
screen.
The Emergency icon appears on the status bar if there are
undeleted emergency alarms in the Alarm List.
When your radio receives an Emergency Alarm, and you
change the radio channel, the Emergency Alarm list is hidden.
The new channel displays the Emergency icon and the red LED
blinks. When you change the radio channel back to the previous
channel, it also displays the Emergency icon and the red LED
blinks.
Advanced Features
To revisit the Alarm List, press g to access the menu and
select Alarm List.
• Regular – Radio transmits an alarm signal and shows audio
 Responding to an Emergency Alarm
Procedure:
When receiving an Emergency Alarm:
1 In the Alarm List, f or h to the required alias.
If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you
hear a short alert tone the moment the transmitting radio
45
English
releases the PTT button, indicating the channel is free for
you to respond.
3 Press PTT button to transmit non-emergency voice to the
same group that the Emergency Alarm was targeted to. The
green LED lights up. Your radio remains in the Emergency
mode.
4 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
Advanced Features
5 Release the PTT button to listen. When the emergency
initiating radio responds, the green LED blinks. You see the
Group Call icon, the group alias or ID, and transmitting radio
alias or ID on your display.
6 Your radio displays the Alarm List.
Emergency voice can only be transmitted by the emergency
initiating radio. All other radios (including the emergency
receiving radio) transmit non-emergency voice.
46
English
 Sending an Emergency Alarm
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm, a
non-voice signal, which triggers an alert indication on a group of
radios.
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the
Emergency footswitch.
2 The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The
green LED lights up and the Emergency icon appears.
OR
The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination
alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon
appears.
3 When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is received,
the Emergency tone sounds and the green LED blinks. The
display shows Alarm Sent.
OR
If your radio does not receive an Emergency Alarm
acknowledgement, and after all retries have been
exhausted, a tone sounds and the display shows Alarm
Failed.
4 Radio exits the Emergency Alarm mode and returns to the
Home screen.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or
visual indicators during Emergency mode.
 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Call
Wait for the PTT Sidetone to finish (if enabled) and
speak clearly into the microphone.
7 Release the PTT button to listen.
Procedure:
8 When the channel is free for you to respond, a short alert
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the
Emergency footswitch.
2 The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The
green LED lights up and the Emergency icon appears.
OR
The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination
alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon
appears.
3 When an Emergency Alarm acknowledgment is received,
the Emergency tone sounds and the green LED blinks. The
display shows Alarm Sent.
4 Your radio enters the emergency call mode when the display
shows Emergency and the destination group alias.
5 Press PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights up
and the group icon appears on the display.
When you receive a group call, the display shows the caller
alias and group alias.
tone sounds (
if the Channel Free Indication feature is
enabled). Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
Once your call ends, press Emergency Off button to exit
the Emergency mode.
9 The radio returns to the Home screen.
Advanced Features
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group
of radios. Upon acknowledgement by a radio within the group,
the group of radios can communicate over a programmed
Emergency channel.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or
visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received
calls to sound through the radio’s speaker, until you press the
PTT button to initiate the call.
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any
audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode, but allow
incoming calls to sound through the radio’s speaker. The
indicators only appear once you press the PTT button to initiate,
or respond to, the call.
6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
OR
47
English
 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Voice to
Follow
This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to a group
of radios. Your radio’s microphone is automatically activated,
allowing you to communicate with the group of radios without
pressing the PTT button.
This activated microphone state is also known as “hot mic”.
Advanced Features
If you press the PTT button during the programmed hot mic
transmission period, the radio ignores the PTT press and
remains in Emergency mode.
NOTE: If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and
continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires,
the radio continues to transmit until you release the
PTT button.
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed Emergency On button or the
Emergency footswitch.
2 The display shows Tx Alarm and the destination alias. The
green LED lights up and the Emergency icon appears.
OR
The display shows Tx Telegram and the destination
alias. The LED lights up solid green and the Emergency icon
appears.
48
English
3 Once the display shows Alarm Sent, speak clearly into the
microphone. When hot mic has been enabled, the radio
automatically transmits without a PTT press until the hot mic
duration expires.
4 While transmitting, the green LED lights up and the
Emergency icon appears.
5 Once the hot mic duration expires, the radio automatically
stops transmitting. To transmit again, press the PTT button.
6 Press Emergency Off button to exit the Emergency mode.
7 The radio returns to the Home screen.
If your radio is set to Silent, it does not display any audio or
visual indicators during Emergency mode, or allow any received
calls to sound through the radio’s speaker, until the
programmed hot mic transmission period is over, and you press
the PTT button.
If your radio is set to Silent with Voice, it does not display any
audio or visual indicators during Emergency mode when you
are making the call with hot mic, but allow sound through the
radio’s speaker when the target radio responds after the
programmed hot mic transmission period is over. The indicators
only appear when you press the PTT button.
NOTE: If the Emergency Alarm request fails, the radio does
not retry to send the request, and enters the hot mic
state directly.
 Exiting Emergency Mode
NOTE: This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the
Emergency Alarm.
NOTE: This feature is only applicable to the radio sending the
Emergency Alarm.
There are two instances where this can happen:
Your radio exits Emergency mode when one of the following
occurs:
• You change the channel while the radio is in Emergency
mode. This exits the Emergency mode. If Emergency Alarm is
enabled on this new channel, the radio reinitiates Emergency.
• You press the programmed Emergency On button during an
Emergency initiation/transmission state. This causes the
radio to exit this state, and to reinitiate Emergency.
• Emergency Alarm acknowledgement is received (for
Emergency Alarm only), OR
•
An Emergency Exit Telegram is received, OR
• All retries to send the alarm have been exhausted, OR
• The Emergency Off button is pressed.
Advanced Features
 Reinitiating an Emergency Mode
NOTE: If your radio is powered off, it exits the Emergency
mode. The radio does not reinitiate the Emergency
mode automatically when it is turned on again.
If you change channels when your radio is in
Emergency mode to a channel that has no emergency
system configured, No Emergency is shown on your
display.
49
English
Text Messaging Features
Your radio is able to receive data, for example a text message,
from another radio or an e-mail application.
 Sending a Quick Text Message
Your radio supports a maximum of 0 Quick Text messages as
programmed by your dealer.
Advanced Features
NOTE: While Quick Text messages are programmed, you can
edit each message before sending it. Only available
with a keypad microphone (see Editing a Quick Reply
Message on page 90).
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Quick Text and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required Quick Text and press g to
select.
5 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
50
select.
English
6 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
7 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51).
 Sending a Quick Text Message with the One Touch
Access Button
1 Press the programmed One Touch Access button to send
a predefined Quick Text message to a predefined alias or
ID.
2 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
3 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
3 f or h to Drafts and press g to select.
 Managing Text Messages in the Drafts Folder
 Deleting a Saved Text Message from Drafts
The Drafts folder stores a maximum of ten (10) last saved
messages. When the folder is full, the next saved text message
automatically replaces the oldest text message in the folder.
See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 90 for more
information.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
NOTE: You can edit a saved text message before sending it.
Only available with a keypad microphone (see Editing
and Sending a Saved Text Message on page 91).
1 g to access the menu.
Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
 Viewing a Saved Text Message
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
Advanced Features
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51).
3 f or h to Drafts and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
5 Press g again while viewing the message.
6 f or h to Delete and press g to delete the text
message.
 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages
1 g to access the menu.
You can select one of the following options while at the Resend
option screen:
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
• Resend
• Forward
51
English
• Edit (Only available with a keypad microphone – see Editing
a Text Message on page 92 for more information)
NOTE: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity
Plus) is not a match, you can only edit and forward a
Fail-to-Send message.
 Resending a Text Message
Procedure:
1 Press g to resend the same message to the same
subscriber/group alias or ID.
Advanced Features
2 If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the message cannot be sent, the display shows negative
mini notice.
 Forwarding a Text Message
Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/
group alias or ID.
Procedure:
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
4 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
You can also manually select a target radio address (see
Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial on page 91).
 Managing Sent Text Messages
Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in Sent
Items. The most recent sent text message is always added to
the top of the Sent Items list.
The Sent Items folder is capable of storing a maximum of
thirty (30) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the next
sent text message automatically replaces the oldest text
message in the folder.
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
1 f or h to Forward and press g to select.
 Viewing a Sent Text Message
2 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
select.
52
English
OR
Follow the procedure below.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Sent Items and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
The icon beside each message indicates the status of the
message (see Sent Item Icons on page 12).
 Sending a Sent Text Message
You can select one of the following options while viewing a sent
text message:
• Resend
• Forward
• Edit
• Delete
NOTE: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity
Plus) is not a match, you can only edit, forward, or
delete a Sent message.
1 Press g again while viewing the message.
2 f or h to Resend and press g to select.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming that
the same message is being sent to the same target radio.
4 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen. Press g to resend the message to the
same subscriber/group alias or ID.
Advanced Features
1 g to access the menu.
Procedure:
NOTE: Changing the volume, and pressing any button, except
for g, f, or h, returns you to the message.
The radio exits the Resend option screen if you press
the PTT button to initiate a Private or Group Call, or to
respond to a Group Call. It also exits the screen when
the radio receives a text or telemetry message, an
emergency call or alarm, or a call alert.
The display returns to the Resend option screen if you
press the PTT button to respond to a Private Call
(except if the radio is displaying the Missed Call
screen), and at the end of an All Call.
53
English
Press f or h to access the Forward, Edit, or Delete
option screen:
• Select Forward to send the selected text message to another
target radio (see Forwarding a Text Message on page 52).
You can also manually select a target radio address using a
keypad microphone (see Forwarding a Text Message by
Manual Dial on page 91).
• Select Edit to edit the selected text message before sending
it (see Editing a Text Message on page 92). Only available
with a keypad microphone.
Advanced Features
• Select Delete to delete the text message.
NOTE: If you exit the message sending screen while the
message is being sent, the radio updates the status of
the message in the Sent Items folder without providing
any indication in the display or via sound.
54
English
If the radio changes mode or powers down before the
status of the message in Sent Items is updated, the
radio cannot complete any In-Progress messages and
automatically marks it with a Send Failed icon.
The radio supports a maximum of five (5) In-Progress
messages at one time. During this period, the radio
cannot send any new message and automatically
marks it with a Send Failed icon.
 Deleting All Sent Text Messages from Sent Items
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Sent Items and press g to select.
4 f or h to Delete All and press g to select.
5 f or h to Yes and press g to select. The display
shows positive mini notice
OR
f or h to No and press g to return to the previous
screen.
When you select Sent Items and it contains no text messages,
the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if
Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On
or Off on page 81).
 Receiving a Text Message
You can select one of the following options when receiving a
text message:
• Read
• Select Read Later to return to the screen you were on prior
to receiving the text message.
• Select Delete to delete the text message.
 Managing Received Text Messages
• Read Later
Use the Inbox to manage your text messages. The Inbox is
capable of storing a maximum of 30 messages.
• Delete
Your radio supports the following options for text messages:
NOTE: The radio exits the Text Message alert screen and sets
up a Private or Group Call to the sender of the
message if the PTT button is pressed when the radio is
displaying the alert screen.
• Reply (via Quick Text)
 Reading a Text Message
• Delete All
Procedure:
NOTE: If the channel type (i.e. conventional digital or Capacity
Plus) is not a match, you can only forward, delete, or
delete all Received messages.
1 f or h to Read and press g to select.
2 Selected message in the Inbox opens.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
3 Press e to return to the Inbox.
OR
Press g to reply, forward, or delete the text message.
Advanced Features
When your radio receives a message, the display shows the
Notification List with the alias or ID of the sender and the
message icon.
Press f or h to access the Read Later or Delete option
screen:
• Forward
• Delete
Text messages in the Inbox are sorted according to the
most recently received.
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
55
English
 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox
6 Long press e to return to the Home screen.
Procedure:
You cannot reply to a Telemetry Status text message.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to view the messages.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
Advanced Features
5 Press g to select the current message, and press g
again to reply, forward, or delete that message.
OR
Long press e to return to the Home screen.
 Replying to a Text Message with Quick Text
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
 Viewing a Telemetry Status Text Message from the
Inbox
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
Procedure:
5 Press g once more to access the sub-menu.
1 g to access the menu.
6 f or h to Reply and press g to select.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
7 f or h to Quick Reply and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
8 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
9 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
5 The display shows Telemetry: .
56
English
message is being sent.
10 If the message is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51).
NOTE: If you are using a keypad microphone, you can also
write and send a new message (see Writing and
Sending a Text Message on page 88) or modify a
Quick Text message before sending it (see Editing a
Quick Reply Message on page 90).
 Deleting a Text Message from the Inbox
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
Advanced Features
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the message cannot be sent, the display shows negative
mini notice.
5 Press g once more to access the sub-menu.
6 f or h to Delete and press g to select.
7 f or h to Yes and press g to select.
8 The display shows positive mini notice.
9 The screen returns to the Inbox.
57
English
 Deleting All Text Messages from the Inbox
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to Delete All and press g to select.
Advanced Features
5 f or h to Yes and press g to select.
6 The display shows positive mini notice.
When you select the Inbox and it contains no text messages,
the display shows List Empty, and sounds a low tone if
Keypad Tones are turned on (see Turning Keypad Tones On
or Off on page 81).
NOTE: Additional text messaging features are available with a
keypad-enabled microphone. Refer to Text Messaging
on page 88 for more details.
58
English
Analog Message Encode
Your radio is able to send preprogrammed messages from the
Message list to a radio alias or to the dispatcher.
 Sending MDC Message Encode to Dispatcher
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Message and press g to select.
3 f or h to Quick Text and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message. Press g to send.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
6 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Analog Status Update
The last acknowledged message is kept at the top of the Status
List. The other messages are arranged in alphanumeric order.
If enabled, this feature helps to prevent eavesdropping by
unauthorized users on a channel by the use of a softwarebased scrambling solution. The signaling and user identification
portions of a transmission are not scrambled.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
Your radio must have privacy enabled on the channel to send a
privacy-enabled transmission, although this is not a necessary
requirement for receiving a transmission. While on a privacyenabled channel, the radio is still able to receive clear
(unscrambled) transmissions.
2 f or h to Status and press g to select.
Your radio supports two types of privacy:
3 f or h to the required status. Press g to select.
• Basic Privacy
4 f or h to Set as Default. Press g to send the
• Enhanced Privacy.
 Sending Status Update to Predefined Contact
status update.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
status update is being sent.
6 If the status update is acknowledged, a tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice. A 9 appears beside the
acknowledged status.
OR
If the status update is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds
and the display shows negative mini notice. A 9 remains
beside the previous status.
Advanced Features
Your radio is able to send preprogrammed messages from the
Status List indicating your current activity to the dispatcher.
Privacy
Only ONE of the privacy types above can be assigned to the
radio.
To unscramble a privacy-enabled call or data transmission, your
radio must be programmed to have the same Privacy Key (for
Basic Privacy), OR the same Key Value and Key ID (for
Enhanced Privacy) as the transmitting radio.
If your radio receives a scrambled call that is of a different
Privacy Key, OR a different Key Value and Key ID, you will
either hear a garbled transmission (Basic Privacy) or nothing at
all (Enhanced Privacy).
59
English
The green LED lights up while the radio is transmitting and
double blinks when the radio is receiving an ongoing privacyenabled transmission.
NOTE: Some radio models may not offer this Privacy feature.
Check with your dealer or system administrator for
more information.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Privacy button to toggle privacy on or
off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
Advanced Features
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Privacy.
5 Press g to enable Privacy. The display shows 9 beside
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Privacy. The 9 disappears from beside
Enabled.
If the radio has a privacy type assigned, the secure or unsecure
icon appears on the status bar, except when the radio is
sending or receiving an Emergency call or alarm.
60
English
IP Site Connect
This feature allows your radio to extend communication beyond
the reach of a single site, by connecting to different available
sites via an Internet Protocol (IP) network.
NOTE: This feature is not applicable in Capacity Plus.
When the radio moves out of range from one site and into the
range of another, it connects to the new site's base station to
send or receive calls/data transmissions. Depending on your
settings, this is done automatically or manually.
If the radio is set to do this automatically, it scans through all
available sites when the signal from the current site is weak or
when the radio is unable to detect any signal from the current
site. It then locks on to the base station with the strongest
Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) value.
In a manual site search, the radio searches for the next site in
the roam list that is currently in range (but which may not have
the strongest signal) and locks on to it.
NOTE: Each channel can only have either Scan or Roam
enabled, not both at the same time.
Channels with this feature enabled can be added to a particular
roam list. The radio searches the channel(s) in the Members list
during the automatic roam operation to locate the best site.
A Members list supports a maximum of 16 channels (including
the Selected Channel).
4 f or h to Site Roaming and press g to select.
 Starting an Automatic Site Search
6 The radio returns to the Home screen. The display shows
NOTE: The radio only scans for a new site if the current signal
is weak or when the radio is unable to detect any signal
from the current site. If the RSSI value is strong, the
radio remains on the current site.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button.
1 A tone sounds and the display shows Site Unlocked.
2 The yellow LED blinks rapidly when the radio is actively
searching for a new site, and turns off once the radio locks
on to a site.
3 The display shows the channel alias and the site roaming
icon appears.
OR
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
5 f or h to Unlock Site and press g to select. A tone
sounds and the display shows Site Unlocked.
the channel alias and the site roaming icon appears.
7 The yellow LED blinks rapidly when the radio is actively
searching for a new site, and turns off once the radio locks
on to a site.
The radio also performs an automatic site search (site is
unlocked) during a PTT button press or data transmission if
the current channel, an IP Site Select channel with an attached
roam list, is out of range.
Advanced Features
NOTE: You cannot manually add or delete an entry to the
Members list. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
 Stopping an Automatic Site Search
When the radio is actively searching for a new site:
Procedure:
Press the programmed Site Lock On/Off button.
1 A tone sounds and the display shows Site Locked.
2 The LED turns off and the display shows the channel alias.
OR
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
61
English
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Site Roaming and press g to select.
5 f or h to Lock Site State.
6 Press g to lock site. The display shows 9 beside Enabled.
Advanced Features
OR
Press g to unlock site. The 9 disappears from beside
Enabled.
7 The LED turns off and the radio returns to the Home screen.
The display shows the channel alias.
 Starting a Manual Site Search
Procedure:
Press the programmed Manual Site Roam button and proceed
to Step 6.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
62
English
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Site Roaming and press g to select.
5 f or h to Active Search and press g to select.
6 A tone sounds and the display shows Finding Site.
The green LED blinks.
7 If a new site is found, a tone sounds and the LED turns off.
The display shows Site  Found.
OR
If there is no available site within range, a tone sounds and
the LED turns off. The display shows Out of Range.
OR
If a new site is within range, but the radio is unable to
connect to it, a tone sounds and the LED turns off. The
display shows Channel Busy.
8 The radio returns to the Home screen.
Security
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
NOTE: Performing Radio Disable and Enable is limited to
radios with these functions enabled.
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
 Radio Disable
4 f or h to Radio Disable and press g to select.
Procedure:
Use the programmed Radio Disable button.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
1 Press the programmed Radio Disable button.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
2 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
7 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
g to select.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED blinks.
4 Wait for acknowledgment.
5 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
g to select.
request is in progress. The green LED blinks.
Advanced Features
You can enable or disable any radio in the system. For example,
you might want to disable a stolen radio, to prevent the thief
from using it, and enable that radio, when it is recovered.
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Do not press e during the Radio Disable operation as you will
not get an acknowledgement message.
You can also access this feature using manual dial (see Radio
Disable via Manual Dial on page 93).
OR
63
English
 Radio Enable
3 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
Procedure:
Use the programmed Radio Enable button.
4 f or h to Radio Enable and press g to select. The
1 Press the programmed Radio Enable button.
2 f or h to the required subscriber alias or ID and press
g to select.
3 The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias
or ID. The green LED lights up.
4 Wait for acknowledgment.
Advanced Features
5 If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and
the display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone
and the display shows negative mini notice.
g to select.
green LED blinks.
5 The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias
or ID. The green LED lights up.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
7 If successful, a tone sounds and the display shows Radio
Enable Successful.
OR
If not successful, a tone sounds and the display shows
Radio Enable Failed.
Do not press e during the Radio Enable operation as you will
not get an acknowledgement message.
You can also access this feature using manual dial (see Radio
Enable via Manual Dial on page 93).
OR
Procedure:
Use the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
64
English
Lone Worker
Following no user activity for a programmed duration, the radio
pre-warns the user via an audio indicator once the inactivity
timer expires.
If there is still no acknowledgment by the user before the
predefined reminder timer expires, the radio initiates an
Emergency Alarm.
Only one of the following Emergency Alarms is assigned to this
feature:
• Emergency Alarm
• Emergency Alarm with Call
• Emergency Alarm with Voice to Follow
The radio remains in the emergency state allowing voice
messages to proceed until action is taken. See Emergency
Operation on page 44 on ways to exit Emergency.
NOTE: This feature is limited to radios with this function
enabled. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
NOTE:
This feature allows you to use your radio with a Bluetoothenabled device (accessory) via a Bluetooth connection. Your
radio supports both Motorola and COTS (Commercially
available Off-The-Shelf) Bluetooth-enabled devices.
Bluetooth operates within a range of 10 meters line of sight.
This is an unobstructed path between your radio and your
Bluetooth-enabled device.
It is not recommended that you leave your radio behind and
expect your Bluetooth-enabled device to work with a high
degree of reliability when they are separated.
At the fringe areas of reception, both voice and tone quality will
start to sound "garbled" or "broken". To correct this problem,
simply position your radio and Bluetooth-enabled device closer
to each other (within the 10-meter defined range) to re-establish
clear audio reception. Your radio’s Bluetooth function has a
maximum power of 2.5 mW (4 dBm) at the 10-meter range.
Advanced Features
This feature prompts an emergency to be raised if there is no
user activity, such as any radio button press or activation of the
channel selector, for a predefined time.
Bluetooth
Your radio can support up to 3 simultaneous Bluetooth
connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of unique types.
For example, a headset, a scanner, and a PTT-Only Device
(POD). Multiple connections with Bluetooth-enabled devices of
the same type are not supported.
Refer to your respective Bluetooth-enabled device’s user
manual for more details on your Bluetooth-enabled device’s full
capabilities.
65
English
 Turning Bluetooth On or Off
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Bluetooth and press g to select.
3 f or h to My Status and press g to select.
4 The display shows On and Off. f or h to On and press
g to enable Bluetooth. 9 appears beside On. The
Advanced Features
Bluetooth icon appears on the status bar.
OR
The display shows On and Off. f or h to Off and press
g to disable Bluetooth. 9 appears beside Off.
 Finding and Connecting to a Bluetooth Device
Procedure:
1 Turn on your Bluetooth-enabled device and place it in
pairing mode. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled
device’s user manual.
2 On your radio, press g to access the menu.
3 f or h to Bluetooth and press g to select.
4 f or h to Devices and press g to select.
5 f or h to the required device and press g to select.
66
OR
English
f or h to Find Devices to locate available devices.
f or h to the required device and press g to select.
6 f or h to Connect and press g to select. Display
shows Connecting to .
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps
to complete the pairing. Refer to respective Bluetoothenabled device’s user manual.
7 If successful, the radio display shows 
Connected. A tone sounds and 9 appears beside the
connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon appears
on the status bar.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio display shows Connecting
Failed.
Do not turn off your Bluetooth-enabled device or press e
during the finding and connecting operation as this cancels the
operation.
NOTE: If pin code is required, use the same entry method as
Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on
page 94.
 Switching Audio Route
Procedure:
You can toggle audio routing between internal radio speaker
and external Bluetooth-enabled accessory.
1 On your radio, press g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Bluetooth and press g to select.
3 f or hto Devices and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required device and press g to select.
5 f or hto Disconnect and press g to select. Display
shows Disconnecting from .
Your Bluetooth-enabled device may require additional steps
to disconnect. Refer to respective Bluetooth-enabled
device’s user manual.
6 The radio display shows  Disonnected. A
positive indicator tone sounds and 9 disappears beside the
connected device. The Bluetooth Connected icon
disappears on the status bar.
Procedure:
1 Press the programmed Bluetooth Audio Switch button .
2 A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to Radio.
OR
A tone sounds and display shows Route Audio to
Bluetooth.
 Viewing Device Details
Advanced Features
 Disconnecting from a Bluetooth Device
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Bluetooth and press g to select.
3 f or h to Devices and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required device and press g to select.
5 f or h to View Details and press g to select.
67
English
Notification List
Your radio has a Notification List that collects all your “unread”
events on the channel, such as unread text messages,
telegrams, telemetry messages, missed calls, and call alerts.
The Notification icon appears on the status bar when the
Notification List has one or more events.
The list supports a maximum of forty (40) unread events. When
it is full, the next event automatically replaces the oldest event.
Advanced Features
After the events are read, they are removed from the
Notification List.
NOTE: Your radio suspends Scan when the Notification List is
displayed. Scanning resumes when your radio exits the
Notification List. Press e to exit the Notification List
or wait for the menu timer to expire.
Accessing the Notification List
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Notification and press g to select.
3 f or h to the required event and press g to select.
Long press e to return to the Home screen.
68
English
Utilities
 Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off
You can enable and disable all radio tones and alerts (except for
the incoming Emergency alert tone) if needed.
Procedure:
Press the programmed All Tones/Alerts button to toggle all
tones on or off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to All Tones and press g to select.
6 Press g to enable all tones. The display shows 9 beside
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable all tones. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
 Setting the Tone Alert Volume Offset Level
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to Vol. Offset and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
5 f or h to Talk Permit and press g to select.
6 Press g to enable Talk Permit Tone. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Talk Permit Tone. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
Advanced Features
You can adjust the Tone Alert Volume Offset level if needed.
This feature adjusts the volume of the tones/alerts, allowing it to
be higher or lower than the voice volume.
Procedure:
6 f or h to the required volume value. The radio sounds a
feedback tone with each corresponding volume value.
7 Press g to keep the required displayed volume value.
OR
Repeat Step 6 to select another volume value.
OR
e to exit without changing the current volume offset
settings.
 Turning the Talk Permit Tone On or Off
You can enable and disable the Talk Permit Tone if needed.
 Setting the Power Level
You can customize your radio’s power setting to high or low for
each channel.
Settings: High enables communication with radios located at
a considerable distance from you. Low enables communication
with radios in closer proximity.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Power Level button to toggle transmit
power level between high and low.
69
English
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Power and press g to select.
5 f or h to the required setting and press g to select. 9
appears beside selected setting.
Advanced Features
4 f or h to Day/Night and press g to select.
5 The display shows Day Mode and Night Mode. f or h
to the required setting and press g to enable. 9 appears
beside selected setting.
 Adjusting the Display Brightness
You can adjust radio’s display brightness as needed.
Long press e to return to the Home screen. The power level
icon is visible.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Brightness button and proceed to
Step 5.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
 Changing the Display Mode
1 g to access the menu.
You can change radio’s display mode between Day or Night, as
needed. This affects the colorcolour palette of the display.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
6 Screen returns to the previous menu.
70
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Display Mode button to toggle the
display mode settings.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
English
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Brightness and press g to select.
5 The display shows a progress bar. Decrease display
brightness by pressing h or increase the display
brightness by pressing f. Press g to confirm your entry.
 Turning the Public Address System On or Off
Your radio is able to notify you of an incoming call via the horns
and lights feature. When activated, an incoming call sounds
your vehicle's horn and turns on its lights.
You can enable and disable the radio’s internal public address
(PA) system.
This feature needs to be installed through your radio’s rear
accessory connector by your dealer.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Horns/Lights button to toggle horns
and lights feature on or off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Horns/Lights and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable Horns/Lights. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Horns/Lights. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled
Procedure:
Press the programmed PA On/Off button to toggle the feature
on or off.
 Turning the External Public Address System On
or Off
You can enable or disable the audio routing between the
connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the
radio’s internal public address (PA) system.
Advanced Features
 Turning Horns/Lights On or Off
Procedure:
Press the programmed Ext PA On/Off button to toggle the
feature on or off.
 Setting the Squelch Level
You can adjust your radio's squelch level to filter out unwanted
calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher
than normal background noise.
Settings: Normal is the default. Tight filters out (unwanted)
calls and/or background noise. However, calls from remote
locations may also be filtered out.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Squelch button to toggle squelch level
71
English
between normal and tight.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Squelch and press g to select.
5 The display shows Tight and Normal. f or h to the
required setting and press g to enable. 9 appears
besides selected setting.
Advanced Features
6 Screen returns to the previous menu.
 Turning the Introduction Screen On or Off
You can enable and disable the Introduction Screen if needed.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Intro Screen and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable Introduction Screen. The display shows
72
9 beside Enabled.
English
OR
Press g to disable Introduction Screen. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
 Turning the LED Indicators On or Off
You can enable and disable the LED Indicators if needed.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to LED Indicator and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable LED indicator. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable LED indicator. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
 Setting Dual Knob Operation Preference
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Dual Knob and press g to select.
5 The display shows Volume Only and Volume & Ch.
f or h to the required setting and press g to enable.
9 appears besides selected setting.
6 Screen returns to the previous menu.
Feature On or Off
This feature allows you to initiate a hands-free voice activated
call on a programmed channel. The radio automatically
transmits, for a programmed period, whenever the microphone
on the VOX-capable accessory detects voice.
NOTE: You may need to turn off the radio and power it up
again after detaching the VOX-capable microphone
from it to allow the radio to switch to another valid
accessory.
Pressing the PTT button during radio operation disables VOX.
To re-enable VOX, do one of the following:
• Turn the radio off and power it on again, OR
• Change the channel via the Scroll Up/Down buttons, OR
 Language
• Change the channel via the Volume/Channel Knob, OR
You can set your radio display to be in your required language.
• Follow the procedure below.
Procedure:
NOTE: Turning this feature on or off is limited to radios with
this function enabled. Check with your dealer or system
administrator for more information.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
Advanced Features
Your radio has a dual-purpose Volume/Channel Knob.
Disabling the dual-purpose option sets the knob to work as a
Volume Knob only.
 Turning the Voice Operating Transmission (VOX)
3 f or h to Language and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required language and press g to
enable. 9 appears beside selected language.
73
English
Advanced Features
Procedure:
Press the programmed VOX button to toggle the feature on or
off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Option Board Feature button to toggle
the feature on or off.
1 g to access the menu.
You can select the type of cable your radio uses.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
Procedure:
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
4 f or h to VOX and press g to select.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable VOX. The display shows 9 beside
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable VOX. The 9 disappears from beside
Enabled.
If the Talk Permit Tone feature is enabled (see Turning the Talk
Permit Tone On or Off on page 69), use a trigger word to
initiate the call. Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish before
speaking clearly into the microphone.
 Turning the Option Board Feature(s) On or Off
Option board capabilities within each channel and can be
assigned to programmable buttons. Refer to your dealer or
system administrator for more information.
 Identifying Cable Type
4 f or h to Cable Type and press g to select.
5 The current cable type is indicated by a 9.
 Voice Announcement
This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current
Zone or Channel the user has just assigned, or programmable
button press. This audio indicator can be customized per
customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is
in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display.
Use the following features to toggle Voice Announcement on or
off.
Procedure:
74
English
Press g to disable Call Forwarding. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
1 g to access the menu.
 Menu Timer
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
Set the period of time your radio stays in the menu before it
automatically switches to the Home screen.
3 f or h to Voice Announcement.
4 Press g to enable Voice Announcement. The display
shows 9 beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Voice Announcement. The 9
disappears from beside Enabled.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Menu Timer and press g to select.
 Call Forwarding
You can enable your radio to automatically forward voice calls
to another radio.
Procedure:
5 f or h to the required setting and press g to enable.
 Analog Mic AGC
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
automatically while transmitting on an analog system. It
suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in
order to provide a consistent level of audio.
3 f or h to Call Forward.
Procedure:
4 Press g to enable Call Forwarding. The display shows 9
1 g to access the menu.
1 g to access the menu.
beside Enabled.
OR
Advanced Features
Press the programmed Voice Announcement button.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
75
English
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
 Intelligent Audio
4 f or h to Analog Mic AGC.
Your radio automatically adjusts its audio volume to overcome
current background noise in the environment, inclusive of both
stationary and non-stationary noise sources. This feature is a
Receive-only feature and does not affect Transmit audio.
5 Press g to enable Analog Mic AGC. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Analog Mic AGC. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
Advanced Features
 Digital Mic AGC
This feature controls the your radio's microphone gain
automatically while transmitting on an digital system. It
suppresses loud audio or boosts soft audio to a preset value in
order to provide a consistent level of audio.
Procedure:
Use the following features to toggle Intelligent Audio on or off.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Intelligent Audio button to toggle the
feature on or off.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
4 f or h to Intelligent Audio.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
5 Press g to enable Intelligent Audio. The display shows 9
4 f or h to Digital Mic AGC.
5 Press g to enable Digital Mic AGC. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Digital Mic AGC. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
76
English
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Intelligent Audio. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
 Accessing General Radio Information
Global Positioning System (GPS) is a satellite navigation
system that determines the radio’s precise location.
Your radio contains information on the following:
Procedure:
Press the programmed GPS button to toggle the feature on or
off.
OR
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
• Radio Alias and ID
• Firmware and Codeplug Versions
• GPS Information
NOTE: Press e at any time to return to the previous screen
or long press e to return to the Home screen. The
radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer
expires.
4 f or h to GPS.
 Checking the Radio Alias and ID
5 Press g to enable GPS. The display shows 9 beside
Displays the ID of your radio.
Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable GPS. The 9 disappears from beside
Enabled.
See Checking the GPS Information on page 78 for details on
retrieving GPS information.
Advanced Features
 GPS
Procedure:
Press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button to check your
radio alias and ID. You hear a positive indicator tone.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Info and press g to select.
4 f or h to My Number and press g to select.
77
English
5 The first line of the display shows the radio alias. The
second line of the display shows the radio ID.
Displays the GPS information on your radio, such as values of:
You can also press the programmed Radio Alias and ID button
to return to the previous screen.
• Latitude
 Checking the Firmware Version and Codeplug
• Altitude
Version
Displays the firmware and codeplug versions on your radio.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
Advanced Features
 Checking the GPS Information
3 f or h to Radio Info and press g to select.
4 f or h to Versions and press g to select.
The display shows the current firmware and codeplug versions.
78
English
• Longitude
• Direction
• Velocity
• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)
• Satellites
• Version
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Info and press g to select.
4 f or h to GPS Info and press g to select.
5 f or h to the required item and press g to select.
6 The display shows the requested GPS information.
See GPS on page 77 for details on GPS.
Keypad Microphone Features
Using the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Advanced Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Password Lock Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Panel Configuration (FPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 80
page 81
page 88
page 92
page 93
page 94
page 96
Keypad Microphone Features
The following additional features for your radio are available
with a keypad-enabled microphone:
79
English
Using the Keypad
You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (Motorola part number RMN5127_) to
access your radio’s features. You can use the keypad to enter subscriber aliases or IDs, and text messages. Many characters require
that you press a key multiple times. The table below shows the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required
character.
Keypad Microphone Features
Number of Times Key is Pressed
80
Key
10
11
12
13
‘
* or del
# or space
English
NOTE: Press to enter “0” and long press to activate the CAPS lock. Another long press to turn off the CAPS lock.
NOTE: Press during text entry to delete the character. Press during numeric entry to enter a “*”.
NOTE: Press during text entry to insert a space. Press during numeric entry to enter a “#”.
 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off
Additional Advanced Features
Procedure:
 Selecting a Zone by Alias Search
1 g to access the menu.
Procedure:
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
2 f or h to Zone and press g to select.
4 f or h to Tones/Alerts and press g to select.
3 The current zone is displayed and indicated by a 9.
5 f or h to Keypad Tones and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required zone and proceed to Step 7.
6 Press g to enable keypad tones. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable keypad tones. The 9 disappears from
beside Enabled.
OR
Key in the first character of the required zone.
5 A blinking cursor appears.
Use the keypad to type the required zone.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
Keypad Microphone Features
You can enable and disable Keypad Tones if needed.
6 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
zones with the same name, the radio displays the zone that
is listed first in the zone list.
7 Press g to select.
81
English
8 The display shows  Selected momentarily and
returns to the selected zone screen.
 Initiating a Radio Check by Manual Dial
9 Radio returns to the subscriber alias or ID screen.
If the e button is pressed when the radio is waiting for
acknowledgement, a tone sounds, and the radio terminates all
retries and exits Radio Check mode.
Procedure:
Keypad Microphone Features
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
4 If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with
a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press g to
select.
OR
Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press g.
5 f or h to Radio Check and press g to select.
6 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
7 Wait for acknowledgement.
8 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
82
English
 Initiating Remote Monitor by Manual Dial
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
4 If there was previously dialed ID, the ID appears along with
a blinking cursor. Use the keypad to edit the ID. Press g to
select.
OR
Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press g.
5 f or h to Remote Mon. and press g to select.
6 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED lights up.
7 Wait for acknowledgment.
8 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice. Your radio starts playing
audio from the monitored radio for a programmed duration
and display shows Rem. Monitor.
 Making a Private Call by Manual Dial
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
4 If there is a previously dialed subscriber ID, the ID appears
along with a blinking cursor.
Use the keypad to edit the subscriber ID.
OR
Use the keypad to enter a new subscriber ID.
5 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The display shows the destination alias.
6 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
clearly into the microphone.
7 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
responds, the green LED blinks.
8 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time,
the call ends.
9 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
 Making a Group, Private or All Call with the
Programmable Number Key
The Programmable Number Key feature allows you to make a
Group, Private or All Call to a predefined alias or ID easily. This
feature can be assigned to all the available number keys on a
keypad microphone.
You can ONLY have one alias or ID assigned to a number key,
but you can have more than one number key associated to an
alias or ID.
Keypad Microphone Features
Once the timer expires, the radio sounds an alert tone and
the LED turns off.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone
the display shows negative mini notice.
Procedure:
When you are on the Home screen:
1 Long press the programmed number key to make a Group,
Private or All Call to the predefined alias or ID.
If the number key is not associated to an entry, a negative
indicator tone sounds.
83
English
2 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The Group/Private Call icon appears in the top right
corner. The first text line shows the caller alias. The second
text line displays either the call status for a Private Call or
All Call for All Call.
3 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
Keypad Microphone Features
clearly into the microphone.
OR
84
For Group Call only: Wait for the PTT Sidetone to
finish (if enabled) and speak clearly into the microphone.
4 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
 Making a Group, Private, Phone or All Call by Alias
Search
You can also use alias or alphanumeric search to retrieve the
required subscriber alias.
This feature is only applicable while in Contacts.
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
responds, the green LED blinks. The display shows the
destination alias.
3 Key in the first character of the required alias.
5 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a predetermined period of
time, the call ends.
6 Radio returns to the screen you were on prior to initiating the
call.
For a Private Call, you hear a short tone when the call ends.
See Assigning an Entry to a Programmable Number Key on
page 36 for details on assigning an entry to a number key on
the keypad.
English
4 A blinking cursor appears.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
5 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that
is listed first in the Contacts list.
6 Press the PTT button to make the call. The green LED lights
up. The first line displays the target radio’s ID.
clearly into the microphone
8 Release the PTT button to listen. When the target radio
responds, the green LED blinks. The display shows the
destination alias.
9 If the Channel Free Indication feature is enabled, you hear a
short alert tone the moment the target radio releases the
PTT button, indicating the channel is free for you to respond.
Press the PTT button to respond.
OR
If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time,
the call ends.
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
6 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that is
listed first in the scan list.
 Editing the Scan List by Alias Search
10 You hear a short tone. The display shows Call Ended.
 Adding a New Entry to the Scan List
NOTE: Press e button or g to exit alias search.
Procedure:
 Viewing an Entry in the Scan List by Alias Search
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 Key in the first character of the required alias.
1 g to access the menu.
Keypad Microphone Features
7 Wait for the Talk Permit Tone to finish (if enabled) and speak
5 A blinking cursor appears.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
4 f or h to Add Member and press g to select.
5 Key in the first character of the required alias.
6 A blinking cursor appears.
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
85
English
Press < to move one space to the left.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
Keypad Microphone Features
7 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
aliases with the same name, the radio displays the alias that
is listed first in the list.
8 Press g to select.
9 f or h to the required priority level and press g to
select.
10 The display shows positive mini notice, followed
immediately by Add Another?.
11 f or h to Yes and press g to select, to add another
entry, and repeat Steps 5 to 9.
OR
f or h to No and press g to select to save the current
list.
 Deleting an Entry from the Scan List
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
86
English
4 Key in the first character of the required alias.
5 A blinking cursor appears.
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
6 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that
is listed first in the scan list.
7 Press g to select.
8 f or h to Delete and press g to select.
9 At Delete Entry?, f or h to Yes and press g to
select, to delete the entry. The display shows positive mini
notice.
OR
f or h to No and press g to select to return to the
previous screen.
10 Repeat Steps 4 to 9 to delete other entries.
After deleting all required aliases or IDs, long press e to
return to the Home screen.
List
Procedure:
select.
10 The display shows positive mini notice before returning to
the previous screen.
11 The priority icon appears left of the member’s name.
1 g to access the menu.
There is no priority icon if priority is set to None.
2 f or h to Scan and press g to select.
 Storing an Alias or ID from a Call List
3 f or h to Scan List and press g to select.
Procedure:
4 Key in the first character of the required alias.
1 g to access the menu.
5 A blinking cursor appears.
2 f or h to Call Log and press g to select.
Use the keypad to type the required alias.
3 f or h to the required list and press g to select.
Press > to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
Press < to move one space to the left.
6 The first line of the display shows the characters you keyed
in. The next lines of the display show the shortlisted search
results.
The alias search is case-insensitive. If there are two or more
entries with the same name, the radio displays the entry that
is listed first in the scan list.
7 Press g to select.
8 f or h to Edit Priority and press g to select.
select.
5 f or h to Store and press g to select.
Keypad Microphone Features
 Setting and Editing Priority for an Entry in the Scan
9 f or h to the required priority level and press g to
6 A blinking cursor appears. If needed, key in the alias for that
ID and press g.
7 The display shows positive mini notice.
You can also store an ID without an alias.
87
English
 Making a Call Alert by Manual Dial
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Keypad Microphone Features
4 A blinking cursor appears. Enter the subscriber ID you want
to send the Call Alert to and press g.
5 f or h to Call Alert and press g to select.
6 The display shows Call Alert and the subscriber alias or
ID, indicating that the Call Alert has been sent.
7 The green LED lights up when your radio is sending the Call
Alert.
8 If the Call Alert acknowledgement is received, the display
shows positive mini notice.
OR
If the Call Alert acknowledgement is not received, the
display shows negative mini notice.
Text Messaging
The maximum length of characters for a text message,
including the subject line (seen when receiving message from
an e-mail application), is 140, whereas to receive would be a
maximum of 280 characters.
The radio exits the current screen once the inactivity timer
expires. Any text message in the writing/editing screen is
automatically be saved to the Drafts folder.
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
 Writing and Sending a Text Message
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Compose and press g to select.
4 Use the keypad to type your message.
Press < to move one space to the left.
88
English
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the * key to delete any unwanted characters.
6 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
OR
f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
OR
e to edit the message.
e again to discard the message or save it to the Drafts
folder.
7 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
8 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51 and page 91).
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
3 f or h to Inbox and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required message and press g to select.
A subject line may be shown if the message is from an
e-mail application.
5 Press g once more to access additional options.
6 f or h to Reply and press g to select.
A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to type your
message.
Keypad Microphone Features
5 Press g once message is composed.
 Replying to Text Messages from the Inbox
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the * key to delete any unwanted characters.
7 Press g once message is composed.
8 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
89
English
9 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Keypad Microphone Features
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51 and page 91).
NOTE: If a subject line is present (for messages received from
an e-mail application), you cannot edit it.
 Editing a Quick Reply Message
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the * key to delete any unwanted characters.
6 Press g once message is composed.
7 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
8 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Procedure:
Press the programmed Text Message button and proceed to
Step 3.
OR
Follow the procedure below.
If the text message fails to send, the radio returns you to the
Resend option screen (see Managing Fail-to-Send Text
Messages on page 51 and page 91).
1 g to access the menu.
You can save a text message to send it at a later time.
2 f or h to Messages and press g to select.
If a PTT button press or a mode change causes the radio to exit
the text message writing/editing screen while you are in the
process of writing or editing a text message, your current text
message is automatically saved to the Drafts folder.
3 f or h to Quick Reply and press g to select.
4 f or h to the required Quick Text and press g to
select.
5 A blinking cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the
90
Press < to move one space to the left.
message.
English
 Accessing the Drafts Folder
The most recent saved text message is always added to the top
of the Drafts list. See Managing Text Messages in the Drafts
Folder on page 51 for more information.
If the text message fails to send, it is moved to the Sent Items
folder and marked with a Send Failed icon.
 Editing and Sending a Saved Text Message
 Managing Fail-to-Send Text Messages
Procedure:
if the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the Resend
option screen.
1 Press g again while viewing the message.
2 f or h to Edit and press g to select.
A blinking cursor appears.
Use the keypad to edit your message.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
Press g once message is composed.
3 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
OR
f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber alias or ID and press g.
4 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
5 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
 Forwarding a Text Message by Manual Dial
Select Forward to send the message to another subscriber/
group alias or ID.
Procedure:
1 f or h to Forward and press g to select.
2 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
3 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
Keypad Microphone Features
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
4 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
91
English
 Editing a Text Message
Select Edit to edit the message before sending it.
NOTE: If a subject line is present (for messages received from
an e-mail application), you cannot edit it.
6 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows
positive mini notice.
OR
If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
Procedure:
Keypad Microphone Features
1 f or h to Edit and press g to select.
2 A blinking cursor appears beside the message.
Use the keypad to edit your message.
Press < to move one space to the left.
Press > or the # key to move one space to the right.
Press the *DEL key to delete any unwanted characters.
3 Press g once message is composed.
4 f or h to the required alias or ID and press g to
select.
OR
f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, confirming your
message is being sent.
92
English
Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF)
The Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) feature allows the radio
to operate in a radio system with an interface to telephone
systems.
Procedure:
To initiate a DTMF call.
1 Press and hold the PTT button.
2 Enter the desired number, * or #.
You can turn off the DTMF tone by disabling all radio tones and
alerts (see Turning the Radio Tones/Alerts On or Off on
page 68).
Security
 Radio Enable via Manual Dial
1 g to access the menu.
Procedure:
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Contacts and press g to select. The entries
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
4 f or h to Radio Disable and press g to select.
5 The display shows transitional mini notice, indicating the
request is in progress. The green LED blinks.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
7 If successful, a positive indicator tone sounds and the
display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, a negative indicator tone sounds and the
display shows negative mini notice.
are alphabetically sorted.
3 f or h to Manual Dial and press g to select.
Key in the subscriber ID and press g.
4 f or h to Radio Enable and press g to select.
5 The display shows Radio Enable and the subscriber alias
or ID. The LED lights up solid green.
6 Wait for acknowledgment.
7 If successful, the radio sounds a positive indicator tone and
the display shows positive mini notice.
OR
If unsuccessful, the radio sounds a negative indicator tone
and the display shows negative mini notice.
Keypad Microphone Features
Procedure:
 Radio Disable via Manual Dial
Do not press e during the Radio Enable operation as you will
not get an acknowledgement message.
Do not press e during the Radio Disable operation as you
will not get an acknowledgement message.
93
English
Password Lock Features
If enabled, this feature allows you to access your radio via
password upon powering up. You can use a keypad microphone
or Scroll Up/Down buttons to enter password.
Keypad Microphone Features
 Accessing the Radio from Password
Procedure:
Power up the radio.
1 You hear a continuous tone.
2 Enter your current four-digit password via keypad
microphone.
The display shows ●●●●. Press g to proceed.
OR
Enter your current four-digit password. Press f or h to
edit each digit’s numeric value and g to enter the selected
digit and move to the next digit. Each digit changes to ●.
Press g to confirm your selection.
You hear a positive indicator tone for every digit pressed.
Press < to remove the each ● on the display. You hear a
negative indicator tone, if you press < when the line is
empty, or if you press more than four digits.
94
English
3 If the password is correct:
Your radio proceeds to power up. See Powering Up the
Radio on page 2.
OR
If the password is incorrect:
The display shows Wrong Password. Repeat Step 2.
OR
After the third incorrect password, the display shows
Wrong Password and then, shows Radio Locked. A tone
sounds and the yellow LED double blinks.
Your radio enters into locked state for 15 minutes, and responds
to inputs from On/Off button and programmed Backlight Auto
button only.
NOTE: The radio is unable to receive any call, including
emergency calls, in locked state.
The use of Emergency footswitch cancels out
password input to access the radio.
 Unlocking the Radio from Locked State
1 A tone sounds and the yellow LED double blinks. The
display shows Radio Locked.
2 Wait for 15 minutes. Repeat Accessing the Radio from
Password on page 94.
Your radio restarts the 15 minutes timer for locked state when
you power up.
 Turning the Password Lock On or Off
Procedure:
Press g to enable Password Lock. The display shows 9
beside Enabled.
OR
Press g to disable Password Lock. The 9 disappears
from beside Enabled.
OR
If the password is incorrect:
The display shows Wrong Password and automatically
returns to the previous menu.
 Changing the Password
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
1 g to access the menu.
4 f or h to Passwd Lock and press g to select.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
5 Enter your current four-digit password via keypad
3 f or h to Radio Settings and press g to select.
4 f or h to Passwd Lock and press g to select.
5 Enter a four-digit password.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on
page 94.
Keypad Microphone Features
Procedure:
Wait for 15 minutes. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 in Accessing the
Radio from Password on page 94.
OR
Power up the radio, if you have powered down the radio during
locked state:
6 If the password is correct:
microphone.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on
page 94.
6 If the password is correct:
f or h to Change Pwd and press g to select.
OR
If the password is incorrect:
95
English
The display shows Wrong Password and automatically
returns to the previous menu.
7 Enter a new four-digit password via keypad microphone.
See Step 2 in Accessing the Radio from Password on
page 94.
8 Re-enter the new four-digit password. See Step 2 in
Keypad Microphone Features
Accessing the Radio from Password on page 94.
9 If both of the new password inputs match:
The display shows Password Changed.
OR
If both of the new password inputs do not match:
The display shows Passwords Do Not Match.
10 The screen automatically returns to the previous menu.
96
English
Front Panel Configuration (FPC)
Your radio is able to customize certain feature parameters to
enhance the use of your radio.
 Entering FPC Mode
Procedure:
1 g to access the menu.
2 f or h to Utilities and press g to select.
3 f or h to Program Radio and press g to select.
NOTE: Long press e at any time to return to the Home
screen.
 Editing FPC Mode Parameters
Use the following buttons as required while navigating through
the feature parameters.
f, h, <, > – Scroll through options, increase/decrease
values, or navigate vertically
g – Select the option or enter a sub-menu
e – Short-press to return to previous menu or to exit the
selection screen. Long-press to return to Home screen.
• UHF, 403 – 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Accessories
Mini-U (HAE4002_)
Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desktop Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting Kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
page 97
page 98
page 98
page 99
page 99
page 99
page 99
• UHF, 406 – 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAE4010_)
• UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U
(HAE4003_)
• UHF, 450 – 470 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain , Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAE4011_)
• UHF, 445 – 470 MHz, 5.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount,
Accessories
Your radio is compatible with the accessories listed in this
chapter. Contact your dealer for details.
Mini-U (with base) (RAE4004_RB)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 136 – 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4214_)
Antennas
• VHF, 136 – 144 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4006_)
• VHF, 146 – 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4007_)
• VHF, 150.8 – 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4008_)
• VHF, 162 – 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4009_)
• VHF, 132-174 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain, Through-Hole Mount,
Mini-U (HAD4022_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 146 – 150.8 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4215_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 150.8 – 162 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4216_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 162 – 174 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4217_)
• Combination GPS/VHF, 146 – 172 MHz, 3.0 dB Gain,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (RAD4218_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 403 – 527 MHz, 2.0 dB Gain,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (HAE6019_)
• Combination GPS/UHF, 403 – 430 MHz, 1/4 Wave,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4030_)
97
English
• Combination GPS/UHF, 406 – 420 MHz, 3.5 dB Gain,
Through-Hole Mount, Mini-U (PMAE4032_)
• Fixed Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4000_)
• Window Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4001_)
• Magnetic Mount GPS Active Antenna (PMAN4002_)
Audio
• Telephone Style Handset (HMN4098_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-meter) Cable, 15 amp
(1 – 25 Watt) (HKN4137_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 10-foot (3-meter) Cable, 20 amp
(1 – 45 Watt) (HKN4191_)
• Power Cable to Battery, 20-foot (6-meter) Cable, 20 amp
(1 – 45 Watt) (HKN4192_)
• Mobile and Repeater Rear Accessory Connector Universal
Cable (PMKN4018_)
• Desktop Microphone (RMN5050_)
• Ignition Sense Cable (RKN4136_)
• Compact Microphone (RMN5052_)
• Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 10 feet (PMKN4033_)
• IMPRES 4-Way Navigation Keypad Microphone (RMN5127_)
• Mobile Mic Extension Cable, 20 feet (PMKN4034_)
• Heavy Duty Microphone with Enhanced Audio (RMN5053_)
• Visor Microphone with Enhanced Audio (RMN5054_)
Accessories
Cables
• Operations Critical Wireless earpiece, 12" Cable
(NNTN8125_)
• Operations Critical Wireless earpiece, 9.5" Cable
(NNTN8126_)
• Operations Critical Wireless Push-to-Talk POD (NNTN8127_)
• HK200 Bluetooth Headset (89409N)
98
English
Desktop Accessories
Desktop Tray without Speaker (GLN7318_)
Desktop Tray with Speaker (RSN4005_)
• PL259/Mini-U Antenna Adapter, 8-foot (2.4-meter) Cable
(HKN9557_)
US Line Cord (3060665A04)
• Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones) (HLN9073_)
Switchmode Power Supply 1–25 Watt Models (GPN6145_)
• Universal Microphone Hang Up Clip (All Microphones)
Radio Power Cable for GPN6145_ (GKN6266_)
Power Supply and Cable (HPN4007_)
• Hardware Kit for Rear Accessory Connector (PMLN5072_)
(HLN9414_)
• Push Button PTT (RLN5926_)
Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
Miscellaneous Accessories
• Emergency Footswitch (RLN5929_)
Mounting Kits
• In Dash (DIN) Mounting Kit (RLN6465_)
• Low Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6466_)
• High Profile Trunnion Kit (RLN6467_)
• Key Lock Trunnion Kit (RLN6468_)
Speakers
• 13-Watt External Speaker (RSN4002_)
• 7.5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4003_)
• 5-Watt External Speaker (RSN4004_)
99
English
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the
VHF Frequency Range
Take a moment to review the following:
Special Channel Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 100
Operating Frequency Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 101
Special Channel Assignments
 Emergency Channel
If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require
emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress
call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard.
Transmit the following information, in this order:
“MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY.”
“THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN
__________.”
State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed
by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3
times.
Repeat “MAYDAY” and the name of the vessel.
100
English
“WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________.”
State the position of the vessel in distress, using any
information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:
• latitude and longitude
• bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic
north)
• distance to a well-known landmark
• vessel course, speed or destination
5 State the nature of the distress.
6 Specify what kind of assistance you need.
7 State the number of persons on board and the number
needing medical attention, if any.
8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to
responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or
tonnage, hull color, etc.
9 “OVER.”
10 Wait for a response.
11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the
radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you
receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions
given to you.
 Non-Commercial Call Channel
For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports,
rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing
information, use VHF Channel 9.
Operating Frequency Requirements
• on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications
Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800
MHz frequency
• on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be
capable of operating:
• in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting
frequencies specified in the 156.025 – 157.425 MHz
frequency band, and
• in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels
specified in the table below.
NOTE: Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83
cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US
waters.
Additional information about operating requirements in the
Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC
Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard.
Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List
Frequency (MHz)
Channel
Number
Transmit
Receive
156.050
160.650
Frequency (MHz)
Channel
Number
Transmit
Receive
10
11
12
13**
14
15**
16
17**
18
19
20
22
156.100
156.150
156.200
156.250
156.300
156.350
156.400
156.450
156.500
156.550
156.600
156.650
156.700
156.750
156.800
156.850
156.900
156.950
157.000
157.050
157.100
157.150
160.700
160.750
160.800
160.850
–
160.950
–
156.450
156.500
156.550
156.600
156.650
156.700
156.750
156.800
156.850
161.500
161.550
161.600
161.650
161.700
161.750
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal
Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:
Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued)
101
English
Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF
Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued)
Frequency (MHz)
Channel
Number
Transmit
Receive
24
25
26
27
28
60
62
63
65
66
67**
68
69
71
72
73
74
75
76
77**
157.200
157.250
157.300
157.350
157.400
156.025
156.075
156.125
156.175
156.225
156.275
156.325
156.375
156.425
156.475
156.575
156.625
156.675
156.725
***
***
156.875
161.800
161.850
161.900
161.950
162.000
160.625
160.675
160.725
160.775
160.825
160.875
160.925
156.375
156.425
156.475
156.575
–
156.675
156.725
***
***
–
102
English
Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued)
Frequency (MHz)
Channel
Number
Transmit
Receive
78
79
80
84
85
86
87
88
156.925
156.975
157.025
157.075
157.125
157.175
157.225
157.275
157.325
157.375
157.425
161.525
161.575
161.625
161.675
161.725
161.775
161.825
161.875
161.925
161.975
162.025
* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be
lawfully used by the general public in US waters.
** Low power (1 W) only
*** Guard band
NOTE: A – in the Receive column indicates that the channel is
transmit only.
obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty
unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA.
Limited Warranty
I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW
LONG:
MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC. (“MOTOROLA”) warrants the
MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below
(“Product”) against defects in material and workmanship under
normal use and service for a period of time from the date of
purchase as scheduled below:
XPR Series Digital Mobile Radios
Two (2) Years
Product Accessories
One (1) Year
MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the
Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or
reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product
during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance
with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are
warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period.
All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of
MOTOROLA.
This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the
original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or
transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the
Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no
Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and
the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the
installation, maintenance or service of the Product.
MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary
equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or
used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product
with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly
excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use
the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range,
coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this
warranty.
Limited Warranty
MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS
II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:
This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S
responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or
refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA’s option, is the
exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL
OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED
WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR
DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE
PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME,
INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR
SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR
103
English
INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT
SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW.
III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:
SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY
LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY.
This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other
rights which may vary from state to state.
Limited Warranty
IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase
and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty
service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation
and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location.
Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its
authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the
company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or
communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining
warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744
US/Canada.
V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:
A) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other
than its normal and customary manner.
B) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect.
104
English
C)Defects or damage from improper testing, operation,
maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment.
D)Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by
defects in material workmanship.
E) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications,
disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition
to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which
adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with
MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the
Product to verify any warranty claim.
F) Product which has had the serial number removed or made
illegible.
G)Rechargeable batteries if:
(1) any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken
or show evidence of tampering.
(2) the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the
battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it
is specified.
H)Freight costs to the repair depot.
I) A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the
software/firmware in the Product, does not function in
accordance with MOTOROLA’s published specifications or the
FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the
Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA.
J) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that
does not affect the operation of the Product.
K) Normal and customary wear and tear.
VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:
Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for
MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA
software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and
distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA
software may be used in only the Product in which the software was
originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be
replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to
produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without
limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or
reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of
rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is
granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA
patent rights or copyrights.
Limited Warranty
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought
against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a
claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and
MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded
against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are
attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are
conditioned on the following:
A) that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such
purchaser of any notice of such claim;
B) that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such
suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and
C)should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA’s opinion
be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a
United States patent, that such purchaser will permit
MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for
such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or
to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing
or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as
depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an
equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as
established by MOTOROLA.
MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent
infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or
parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not
furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability
for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by
MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the
Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with
respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts
thereof.
VII. GOVERNING LAW:
This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A.
105
English
Notes
Notes
106
English

---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Create Date                     : 2011:09:08 11:16:42Z
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Modify Date                     : 2011:11:15 10:47:49+08:00
Metadata Date                   : 2011:11:15 10:47:49+08:00
Copyright                       : MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ©Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Motorola Solutions, Inc.
Title                           : MOTOTRBO User Guide
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows)
Document ID                     : uuid:a4516e1a-5688-4928-aada-f63e6de1508e
Instance ID                     : uuid:61e1a695-0f03-4cfd-a81d-fd24321075a1
Page Count                      : 118
Author                          : Motorola Solutions, Inc.

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools